ase maintenance and storage facility crwu 06-9125 specifications part 6... · okonite company...

ASE Maintenance and Storage Facility CRWU 06-9125

260513 -1 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

SECTION 260513

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY

A. Section includes cables and related cable splices, terminations, and accessories for medium- voltage (2001 to 35,000 V) electrical distribution systems.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. Jacket: A continuous nonmetallic outer covering for conductors or cables.

B. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.

C. Sheath: A continuous metallic covering for conductors or cables.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cable. Include splices and terminations for cables and cable accessories.

1.5

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For each type of cable and accessory.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.



1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Contracting Officer Technical Representative (COTR) no fewer than seven days

in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without COTR’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cables:

a. Aetna Insulated Wire, Inc.; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. General Cable Technologies Corporation. c. Kerite; a Marmon Wire & Cable/Berkshire Hathaway company. d. Okonite Company (The). e. Prysmian Cables & Systems. f. Southwire Company.

2. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories:

a. Adalet; a Scott Fetzer company. b. DSG-Canusa; a Shawcor company. c. Engineered Products Company. d. G&W Electric Company. e. MP Husky. f. RTE Components; Cooper Power Systems, Inc. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. h. Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold. i. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. j. Tyco Electronics; Raychem Products.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1693&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456836318&mf=04&src=wd



















2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.

2.3 CABLES

A. Cable Type: Type MV 105.

B. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS8, ICEA S-93-639/NEMA WC 74, and ICEA S-97-682.

C. Conductor: Copper.

D. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.

E. Strand Filling: Conductor interstices are filled with impermeable compound.

F. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber.

1. Voltage Rating: 15 kV. 2. Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level.

G. Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield.

H. Shielding and Jacket: Corrugated copper drain wires embedded in extruded, chlorinated,

polyethylene jacket.

I. Three-Conductor Cable Assembly: Three insulated, shielded conductors cabled together with ground conductors.

1. Circuit Identification: Color-coded tape (black, red, blue) under the metallic shielding.

J. Cable Jacket: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Comply with ANSI C119.4 for connectors between aluminum conductors or for connections

between aluminum to copper conductors.

B. Copper-Conductor Connectors: Copper barrel crimped connectors. 2.5 SOLID TERMINATIONS

A. Multiconductor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended by seal manufacturer for type of cable

and installation conditions, including orientation.



1. Compound-filled, cast-metal-body, metal-clad cable terminator for metal-clad cable with external plastic jacket.

2. Cast-epoxy-resin sheath seal kit with wraparound mold and packaged, two-part, epoxy- resin casting material.

B. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class

shall be equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations. 1. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief shield

terminator; multiple-wet-process, porcelain, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression-type connector.

2.6 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS

A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable

terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture.

B. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on cables

and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables.

C. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A-load make/break and continuous- current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled.

D. Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 600-A continuous-current rating;

designed for de-energized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled.

E. Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead-front stationary

terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four-terminal units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connection between terminals and complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands, stainless-steel mounting brackets, and attaching hardware.

1. Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic-shielding, water-sealing cap with drain wire. 2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Two-terminal, dead-front junction arranged for

removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. 3. Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed-through accessory units, protective caps,

test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and carrying case. 4. Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on

accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator.

F. Test-Point Fault Indicators: Applicable current-trip ratings and arranged for installation in test

points of load-break separable connectors, and complete with self-resetting indicators capable of being installed with shotgun hot stick and tested with test tool.



G. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and carrying case.

2.7 SPLICE KITS

A. Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing kit manufacturer

for the application.

B. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes, materials, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete splice, with detailed instructions.

1. Combination tape and cold-shrink-rubber sleeve kit with rejacketing by cast-epoxy-resin

encasement or other waterproof, abrasion-resistant material. 2. Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer

heat-shrink jacket. 2.8 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TAPES

A. Ethylene/propylene rubber-based, 30-mil (0.76-mm) splicing tape, rated for 130 deg C

operation. Minimum 3/4 inch (20 mm) wide.

B. Silicone rubber-based, 12-mil (0.30-mm) self-fusing tape, rated for 130 deg C operation. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide.

2.9 ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS

A. Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: 10-mil- (250-micrometer-) thick, corrosion-protective,

moisture-resistant, PVC pipe-wrapping tape.

B. Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch (8 mm) thick, and compatible with cable jacket.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-97-682 before shipping.

B. Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a

test pressure of 5 psig (35 kPa).



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cables according to IEEE 576.

B. Proof conduits prior to conductor installation by passing a wire brush mandrel and then a rubber

duct swab through the conduit. Separate the wire brush and the rubber swab by 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) on the pull rope.

1. Wire Brush Mandrel: Consists of a length of brush approximately the size of the conduit

inner diameter with stiff steel bristles and an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. If an obstruction is felt, pull the brush back and forth repeatedly to break up the obstruction.

2. Rubber Duct Swab: Consists of a series of rubber discs approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter on a length of steel cable with an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. Pull the rubber duct swab through the duct to extract loose debris from the duct.

C. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and

sidewall pressure values.

1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that does not deteriorate conductor or insulation.

2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips, that do not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable.

3. Use pull-in guides, cable feeders, and draw-in protectors as required to protect cables during installation.

4. Do not pull cables with ends unsealed. Seal cable ends with rubber tape.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped bed of 3-inch- (75-mm-) thick, clean sand.

Separate cables crossing other cables or piping by a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of tamped earth, plus an additional 2 inches (50 mm) of sand. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in direction, and buried splices.

G. Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches (305 mm) above cables.

H. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls

by the longest route from entry to exit; support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag.

I. Install sufficient cable length to remove cable ends under pulling grips. Remove length of conductor damaged during pulling.



J. Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits. Use dead- front separable watertight connectors in manholes and other locations subject to water infiltration.

K. Install terminations at ends of conductors, and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard

kits.

L. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows:

1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no feeder is indicated to be connected.

2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal. 3. Standoff Insulator: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal.

M. Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations not

protected by conduit, cable tray, direct burial, or termination materials. In addition to arc- proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows:

1. Clean cable sheath. 2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil (250-micrometer) pipe-wrapping tape. 3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty. 4. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable. 5. Band arc-proofing tape with two layers of 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide half-lapped, adhesive,

glass-cloth tape at each end of the arc-proof tape.

N. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements according to Section 078413 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

O. Install fault indicators on each phase where indicated.

P. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors.

Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings, and hardware.

Q. Ground shields of shielded cable at one point only. Maintain shield continuity and connections

to metal connection hardware at all connection points.

R. Identify cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify phase and circuit number of each conductor at each splice, termination, pull point, and junction box. Arrange identification so that it is unnecessary to move the cable or conductor to read the identification.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.

Certify compliance with test parameters.



2. After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Perform direct-current High Potential test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommended maximum test voltage.

B. Medium-voltage cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 260513


260519 -1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2

SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.5

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, .provide products by the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated.

B. .Copper. Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for .Type THW-2. .Type THHN-2-THWN-2. .Type XHHW-2.

D. VFC Cable:

1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable. 2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, .spiral-wrapped foil plus

85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following. available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.





B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 A. B.

CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

Feeders: Copper Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

Branch Circuits: Copper Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2

CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2- THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless- steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

H. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit.

3.3

INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.



B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4

CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material. and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors..

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.

3.5

IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6

SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.



3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




Page intentionally left blank


260526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agencies field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 01730 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:


260526 -2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground rings, grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS.

1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain

within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.





B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

B. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel sectional type 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m).



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when

indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and

elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS

A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) in test well at the portable/future generator location. The electrode shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator. Ground test well shall be concrete with metal cover, Oldcastle Model G05, reinforced concrete steel frame, 12 inch deep, with 11 1/8 cast iron labeled cover (or equal).



3.4 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned- copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,

cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the

pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned- copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation.

3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.



E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit

or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate

insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

H. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than .No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and

UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three. rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of reinforced concrete steel frame

enclosure, Oldcastle Model G05, 12 inch deep, with 11 1/8 cast iron labeled cover.



1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of

associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.

I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps

to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation.

J. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a

minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4. AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.



2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal[, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1ohm(s). 4. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 5. Manhole/handhole Grounds: 10 ohms.



F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Contracting Officer Technical Representative (COTR) promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



260526 -

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



260529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Atkore International. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456895789&mf=&src=wd









ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.












ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required byscheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



260533 -1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior

ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 2. Section 16700 "Communication Premises Distribution System and 16705

“Communication Outside Plant" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications

1.3

systems.

DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. LEED Submittals:



1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements. 4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney. 6. Picoma Industries.



7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.



2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corporation. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; Hubbell. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,

respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney. 12. RACO; Hubbell. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.



B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb

(23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by

60 mm deep)

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous- hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased (for primary feeder). 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Maintenance/ASE Equipment Bays. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Tools Room



4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic

in damp or wet locations not subject to physical damage.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.



G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m)intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Contracting Officer Technical Representative (COTR) for each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use

roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end



of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as transition from outdoor to

indoor conduit run. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)

temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature

change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

(70 deg C temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.



W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to topof box unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

EE. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at building

entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

4. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Through-Penetration Firestop System."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.



260543 -1 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete-encased conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 2. Handholes and boxes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.



1. Include duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Include ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends,

fittings, and solvent cement. 3. Include accessories for manholes, handholes, and boxes. 4. Include warning planks.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures:

a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and

accessories. b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include reinforcement details. d. Include frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. e. Include Ladder Step details. f. Include grounding details. g. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons,

and sumps. h. Include joint details.




A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.

1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion

fittings. 2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as

required by ASTM C 858.

C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency responsible for testing nonconcrete handholes and boxes.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent

of quantity of each item installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Contracting Officer (CO) no fewer than five days in advance of proposed

interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without CO written permission.

B. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is at grade level unless a lower water table is noted

on Drawings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

A. Comply with ANSI C2.

2.2 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC and Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.3 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES


1. ARNCO Corp. 2. Beck Manufacturing. 3. Cantex, Inc. 4. CertainTeed Corporation. 5. Condux International, Inc. 6. ElecSys, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. IPEX Inc. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, UL 651, ASTM F 512, Type EPC-80 and Type EPC-40, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as the duct.

C. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and

size of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches (300 by 600 by 75 mm) in size, manufactured from 6000-psi (41-MPa) concrete.

a. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching. b. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, 3/8-inch- (10-mm-)

deep letters.



2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES


1. Christy Concrete Products. 2. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 3. Oldcastle Precast Group. 4. Rinker Group, Ltd. 5. Riverton Concrete Products. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile Inc.

B. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box. 1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with hinged steel access door assembly with

tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

a. Cover Hinges: Concealed, with hold-open ratchet assembly. b. Cover Handle: Recessed. c. Cover to be labeled for use.

2. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 3. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, As indicated for each service. 4. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom

unless otherwise indicated. 5. Extensions and Slabs: Designed to mate with bottom of enclosure. Same material as

enclosure.

a. Extension shall provide increased depth of 12 inches (300 mm). b. Slab: Same dimensions as bottom of enclosure, and arranged to provide closure.

6. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability

properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

7. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks, plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of

walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.



c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 3 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

8. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for

each entering duct.

a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near

interior corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.


A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification, complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. Notify Contracting Officer if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes

with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks, as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Government.

C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed, and protect vegetation to remain according to

Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing."

3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables More than 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC, in concrete- encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.



B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC, in direct-buried duct

bank unless otherwise indicated.

D. Underground Ducts Crossing Drivewaysand Roadways: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.

3.3 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-10structural load rating.

4. Cover design load shall not exceed the design load of the handhole or box.

5. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

6. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

3.4 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 312000 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy- duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original grades unless

otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Section 329200 "Lawns and Grasses" and Section 329300 "Exterior Plants."

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures

according to the "Cutting and Patching" Article in Section 01045.

3.5 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts according to NEMA TCB 2.



B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes, to drain in both directions.

C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use

Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC) complete with end bushings in all underground conduit bends for electrical and communication conduit duct installation. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches (1200 mm), both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

E. Installation Adjacent to High-Temperature Steam Lines: Where duct banks are installed parallel

to underground steam lines, perform calculations showing the duct bank will not be subject to environmental temperatures above 40 deg C. Where environmental temperatures are calculated to rise above 40 deg C, and anywhere the duct bank crosses above an underground steam line, install insulation blankets listed for direct burial to isolate the duct bank from the steam line.

F. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells,

spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell

without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 2. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

G. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at

least 10 feet (3 m) outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare

ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

I. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in empty ducts.

J. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare

trench bottoms as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Width: Excavate trench 3 inches (75 mm) wider than duct bank on each side. 3. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas

not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.



4. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

5. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than five spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts.

7. Elbows: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases,

extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

8. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth

and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

9. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

10. Concrete Cover: Install a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete cover at top and bottom, and a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on each side of duct bank.

11. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of

ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (15-mm) reinforcing-rod dowels extending a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

12. Pouring Concrete: Comply with requirements in "Concrete Placement" Article in

Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Place concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power- driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

13. Provide tracer wires with all underground runs. Tracer wiring installation shall be tested

upon completion of installation.



14. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

15. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line. 16. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts for like services and 6

inches (150 mm) between power and signal ducts. 17. Elbows: Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at

building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

18. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete. b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit

horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

19. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work

toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches (100 mm) over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.

a. Place minimum 3 inches (75 mm) of sand as a bed for duct bank. Place sand to a

minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) above top level of duct bank. b. Place minimum 6 inches (150 mm) of engineered fill above concrete encasement

of duct bank.

K. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried ducts and duct banks, placing them 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional planks 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Cast-in-Place Manhole Installation:

1. Finish interior surfaces with a smooth-troweled finish. 2. Windows for Future Duct Connections: Form and pour concrete knockout panels 1-1/2 to

2 inches (38 to 50 mm) thick, arranged as indicated. 3. Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place

concrete, formwork, and reinforcement.



B. Precast Concrete Handhole:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevations:

1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches (375 mm) below finished grade. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set

other manhole frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 3. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, minimum 36”below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade.

Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

D. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of handholes after concrete has cured

at least three days. Waterproofing materials and installation are specified in After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections, and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

E. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of handholes after concrete has cured

at least three days. Dampproofing materials and installation are specified in Section 071113 "Bituminous Dampproofing." After ducts are connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections, and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

F. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms,

and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.



2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 6-inch- (150- mm-) long mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.



260553 -1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

E. All conduit used in this project shall be sized minimum of 3/4”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways: 1. Fire Alarm – Red 2. EMCS – Green 3. Communications – Blue

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage

D. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

E. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

F. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.

G. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.



1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.

E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. 1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 1. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black

ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. ARC FLASH label per UFC 3-560-01 on all electrical equipment. Provide short circuit calculation as required to provide correct label information.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.



D. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

E. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

F. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).



C. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black] ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm)

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black



letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 10-foot (3-m maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 20 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Power.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. All wire ends shall be labeled with panel number and circuit number.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral: Gray.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation and panelboard name.



G. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

H. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

I. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor designation.

J. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

K. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

L. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

M. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

N. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

O. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.



P. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f. Receptacle outlet and Light Switches (clear background and black letters) . g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Variable-speed controllers. k. Push-button stations. l. Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. o. All exit and egress lights next to test switch (exit-EX, egress-EG room number,

unit letter example: EX-205-A ) for inspection and repairs. p. Battery racks. q. Power-generating units. r. Monitoring and control equipment. s. Portable generator tap box with integral 4 pole manual transfer switch.



260572 - 1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

SECTION 260572 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting capacity of circuit protective devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.

1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary



submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.

b. Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of short-circuit study.


A. Qualification Data: For Field Adjusting Agency.

B. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

B. Short-Circuit Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

C. Short-Circuit Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available software developers offering software that may be used for the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ESA Inc. 2. Operation Technology, Inc. 3. Power Analytics, Corporation. 4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.








B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.

C. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output.

2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated

short-circuit duties. 3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or

higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication

factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;

verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in the Evaluations.

G. Short-Circuit Study Output:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio.



d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to the attention of Architect.

2. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties.



4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.

5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and impedance.

6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material.

9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 10. Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or

nonmagnetic).

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated

less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Incoming switchgear. 3. Low-voltage switchgear. 4. Control panels.



5. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 6. Branch circuit panelboards. 7. Disconnect switches.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit study.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results.



260574-1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

SECTION 260574

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.

1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in



equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.


A. Qualification Data: For Field Adjusting Agency.

B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.


A. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the equipment manuals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

B. Arc-Flash Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

C. Arc-Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available software developers offering software that may be used for the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ESA Inc. 2. Operation Technology, Inc. 3. Power Analytics, Corporation. 4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENT

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output:

1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

F. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:








1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Working distance. 6. Incident energy. 7. Hazard risk category. 8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

G. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis:

1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Flash protection boundary. 4. Hazard risk category. 5. Incident energy. 6. Working distance. 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.



D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated

less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Switchgear. 3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals. 4. Low-voltage switchgear. 5. Motor-control centers. 6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 7. Branch circuit panelboards.

3.3 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. Use the short-circuit study output and the field-verified settings of the overcurrent devices.

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.

1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume no motor load.

2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except 240-V ac and 208-V ac systems fed from transformers less than 125 kVA.

F. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.



G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five cycles.

2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).

H. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:

1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.

I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

3.4 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call discrepancies to the attention of Architect.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift. 5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance.



6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

8. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

9. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material.

10. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 11. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic). 12. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and

metallic shield performance parameters.

3.5 LABELING

A. Apply one arc-flash label for 600-V ac, 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards and disconnects.

3.6 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS

A. Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-Flash Study Specialist.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the potential arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of the arc-flash warning labels.




Page is intentionally left blank


260923 -1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

SECTION 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls. 4. Indoor occupancy sensors. 5. Manual control light switch on-off, and controller (photo-eye). 6. Lighting contactors. 7. Emergency shunt relays.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES


1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. Invensys Controls. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 6. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.

B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off function of a program.

3. Astronomic time dial. 4. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays. 5. Skip-a-day mode.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.

B. Description: Solid state, with DPSTdry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lux), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.

3. Time Delay: Fifteen second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.













5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

2.3 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING SWITCHING CONTROLS


1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Eaton Corporation. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 6. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. 8. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand. 9. Watt Stopper.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Switching Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate power pack mounted on luminaire, to detect changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C). 3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated power pack, complying with

UL 773A. Sensor is powered by the power pack. 4. General Space Sensors Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc (108 to 2152 lux),

with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 5. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling. 6. Set-Point Adjustment: Equip with deadband adjustment of 25, 50, and 75 percent above

the "on" set point, or provide with separate adjustable "on" and "off" set points. 7. Test Mode: User selectable, overriding programmed time delay to allow settings check. 8. Control Load Status: User selectable to confirm that load wiring is correct. 9. Indicator: Two digital displays to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.4 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS


1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.















4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. Watt Stopper.

B. System Description: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed.

1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:

a. When no daylight is present (target level). b. When significant daylight is present.

2. System programming is done with two hand-held, remote-control tools.

a. Initial setup tool. b. Tool for occupants to adjust the target levels by increasing the set point up to 25

percent, or by minimizing the electric lighting level.

2.5 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Bryant Electric. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D. 12. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.


2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

















a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn lights

off when selected lighting level is present.

C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

2.6 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Bryant Electric. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D. 12. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C).

2. Switch Rating: Not less than 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V.















3. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

4. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).

5. Switch Type: SP, manual "on," automatic "off." 6. Voltage: Dual voltage, 120 and 277 V type.

2.7 HIGH-BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.

B. General Description: Solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the lamp and ballasts/driver indicated.


2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.

C. Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for mounting heights from 12 to 50 feet (3.7 to 15.2 m).

2.8 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY


1. Lighting Control and Design. 2. Watt Stopper.

B. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."






B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch (13 mm).

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.



2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.

3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.



260926-1 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELBOARDS

SECTION 260926 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Lighting controls using electrically operated circuit breakers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

B. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data,

metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.

C. RS-485: A serial network protocol, similar to RS-232, complying with TIA-485-A.



B. Shop Drawings: For each lighting control panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For panelboards, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.3. Printout of software application and graphic screens.4. Device address list.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppressiondevices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Eaton Corporation; Pow-R-Command Lighting Control Panelboards.2. General Electric Company; A-Series Lighting Control Panels.3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc; SmartBreaker Panels.4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc; i-3 Lighting Controls.5. Square D; PowerLink G3 Lighting Control Panelboards.


A. Input signal from field-mounted or on-board signal source shall open or close one or moreelectrically operated circuit breakers in the lighting control panelboards. Any combination ofinputs shall be programmable to any combination outputs.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, bya qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with 47 CFR, Subpart A and Subpart B, for Class A digital devices.



D. Comply with UL924 standard for emergency lighting. Provide listed automatic load control relay (ALCR) to automatically energize/switch-on emergency lighting load upon loss of the normal power supply and to return the lighting load to switching status when normal power is restored. Provide shunt relay as required to by-pass local control switches to comply with UL924.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

2.4 PANELBOARDS

A. The lighting panelboards may contain remotely operated circuit breakers and standard branch circuit breakers specified in Section 262416 "Panelboards."

B. Assemblies: Comply with UL 67,UL924 and NEMA PB 1.

C. Surge Protective Device: Field mounted, complying with Section 264313 "Surge Protection for

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."

D. Surge Protective Device: Integrally mounted, complying with UL 1449 Type 1.

1. Comply with IEEE C62.41, Category C, 200-kA short-circuit current rating. 2. Non-modular type with the following features and accessories:

a. Digital-display indicator lights for power and protection status.

E. Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances

required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt 22-kA symmetrical short- circuit current available at terminals.

2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Remotely operated branch circuit breakers used for lighting control shall provide branch-circuit overcurrent protection.



B. Labeled with SWD and HID Ratings: Comply with UL 489 for 20-A, single-pole branch devices 20-A circuit breakers, shall be a product of same manufacturer and be of same class as the rated circuit breakers.

C. Remotely Operated Circuit Breakers: Manual override switch or handle position shall enable or

disable the remote operation of the device and allow breaker handle to manually control the breaker's on-off status.

2.6 CONTROLLERS

A. Description: Controllers shall contain the power supply and electronic control for operating and monitoring remotely operated branch circuit breakers.

1. Comply with UL 916; with a microprocessor-based, solid-state, 365-day timing and

control unit. 2. Power Supply: Powered from the panelboard, sized to provide control power for the

operation of the remotely operated circuit breakers, controller, bus system, low-voltage inputs, field-installed occupancy sensors, and low-voltage photo sensors.

3. Integral keypad and digital-display front panel for local setup, including the following:

a. Blink notice, time adjustable from software. b. Ability to log and display remotely operated breaker on-time. c. Capability for accepting downloadable firmware so that the latest production

features may be added in the future without replacing the module.

4. Nonvolatile memory shall retain all setup configurations. After a power failure, the controller shall automatically reboot and return to normal system operation.

5. Time Synchronization: The timing unit shall be updated not less than every hour(s) with the network time server.

B. Timing Unit:

1. 365-day calendar, astronomical clock, and automatic adjustments for daylight savings

and leap year. 2. Clock configurable for 12-hour (A.M./P.M.) or 24-hour format. 3. 16 independent schedules, each having 24 time periods. 4. Schedule periods settable to the minute. 5. Day of week, day of month, day of year with one-time or repeating capability. 6. 32 special date periods.

C. With 16 inputs, each configurable to the following parameters:

1. Normally open, normally closed, two-wire maintained toggle, two-wire momentary

toggle, two-wire momentary on, two-wire momentary off, or three-wire momentary operation.

2. On and off-delay timers for local override operation, adjustable from five minutes to 12 hours. Local override shall be by field-installed, two-wire momentary toggle switch.



2.7 MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES

A. Keypads: Programmable, designed to control lighting applications and functions associated with the equipment of this Section. The units shall be able to control any system output device, including remotely operated circuit breakers, relays, dimmers, and analog outputs.

B. Push-Button Switches: Modular, momentary-contact, low-voltage type.

1. Match color specified in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices."

C. Manual, Maintained Contact, Full- or Low-Voltage Switch: Comply with Section 262726

"Wiring Devices."

D. Wall Plates: Single and multigang plates as specified in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices."

E. Legend: Engraved or permanently silk-screened on wall plate where indicated. Use designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Class 2 and Class 3 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller

than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14

AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces. 1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533

"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

C. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.



D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.2 PANELBOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Mounting Height: top-most switch or circuit breaker, in on position, is not higher than 79 inches above finish floor.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed

panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Create a directory to indicate loads served by each circuit; incorporate Government’s final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are unacceptable.

D. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a qualified service representative:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:



1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Test lighting control features: time clock, emergency lighting to automatically

energize/switch-on emergency lighting load upon loss of the normal power supply.

C. Panelboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




Page Intentionally Left Blank


262200 - 1 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

SECTION 262200

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined by ASCE-7. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 300 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.



B. C. D.

Qualification Data: For testing agency.

Source quality-control test reports.

Field quality-control test reports.

1.5

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

1.7

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.8

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.



B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided , as necessary to comply with available electrical room space.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Acme Electric Corporation. 2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. 3. Controlled Power Company. 4. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company. 6. General Electric Company. 7. Hammond Co. 8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group. 9. Micron Industries Corp. 10. Myers Power Products, Inc. 11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 12. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 13. Square D Co./Groupe Schneider NA; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces with minimum ratings definded within ASCE 7.

C. Cores: One leg per phase.



D. Enclosure: VentilatedTotally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray.

G. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: One 5 percent tap above normal full capacity.

H. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below rated voltage.

I. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

J. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of

115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

K. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

L. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper

electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33

picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz;

minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz. c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

M. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

N. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound

levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.



B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 A.

EXAMINATION

Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION

A. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.3

CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.



C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration. 2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11

months after Substantial Completion. 3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of

scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed

"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



262416 - 1 PANELBOARDS

SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Electronic-grade panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

C. SPD: Surge protection device.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, surge protection device/transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.




A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01730 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. When required by the Contracting Officer, furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.





1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).



C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Contracting (CO) no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without CO written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover.



3. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated

from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity]. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity

neutral bus.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.




A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 1.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton . 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

G. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Eaton . 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.









3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.5 ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS


1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation. 2. Eaton. 3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 4. Liebert Corporation. 5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 6. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory-installed, integral SPD/TVSS; labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 67 after installing SPD/TVSS.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

D. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.

F. Buses:

1. Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs. 2. Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.

2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES












1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared x t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote-mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.

g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.

h. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

i. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips.







j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

k. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.

l. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

m. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

n. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.



4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Government's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."







1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.



3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.



262726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units. 4. Isolated-ground receptacles. 5. Weather-resistant receptacles. 6. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 7. Wall-switches and exterior occupancy sensors. 8. Communications outlets. 9. Cord and plug sets. 10. Floor service outlets. 11. Photoelectric switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. SPD: Surge Protection Device.

G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.



2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2075&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd







2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; IG5362RN. b. Hubbell; IG5362. c. Leviton; 5362-IG. d. Pass & Seymour; IG5362.

2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; VGF20.


















b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

2.5 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES

A. Available Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds. b. EGS/Appleton Electric. c. Killark; Division of Hubbell Inc.

2.6 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; CWL520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; IGL520R. b. Hubbell; IG2310. c. Leviton; 2310-IG. d. Pass & Seymour; IG4700.

2. Description:

a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
















2.7 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description:

1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector. 2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596. 3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external

cable grip. 4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel

wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.8 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.9 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


Single Pole: 1) Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221. 3) Leviton; 1221-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

b. Two Pole: 1) Cooper; AH1222. 2) Hubbell; HBL1222. 3) Leviton; 1222-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.

c. Three Way: 1) Cooper; AH1223. 2) Hubbell; HBL1223.





















3) Leviton; 1223-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.

d. Four Way: 1) Cooper; AH1224. 2) Hubbell; HBL1224. 3) Leviton; 1224-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.

2.10 DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES

A. Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; 6252. b. Hubbell; DR15. c. Leviton; 16252. d. Pass & Seymour; 26252.

B. GFCI, Non-Feed-Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.


a. Cooper; VGF15. b. Hubbell; GF15LA. c. Leviton; 8599. d. Pass & Seymour; 1594.

C. GFCI, Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.


a. Cooper; TWRVGF15. b. Hubbell; GFTR15. c. Pass & Seymour; 1594TRWR.

2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section.





















D. Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120/277 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.


a. Cooper; 7621 (single pole), 7623 (three way). b. Hubbell; DS115 (single pole), DS315 (three way). c. Leviton; 5621-2 (single pole), 5623-2 (three way). d. Pass & Seymour; 2621 (single pole), 2623 (three way).

E. Lighted Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.


a. Cooper; 7631 (single pole), 7633 (three way). b. Hubbell; DS120IL (single pole), DS320 (three way). c. Leviton; 5631-2 (single pole), 5633-2 (three way). d. Pass & Seymour; 2625 (single pole), 2626 (three way).

2. Description: With neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

F. Weather-Resistant and Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; TWR270. b. Hubbell; RR155WRTR. c. Leviton; TWR15. d. Pass & Seymour; 3232TRWR.

G. Telephone Outlet:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649.

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 6. Comply with UL 1863.

H. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:






















1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 3562. b. Leviton; 40159.

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 6. Comply with UL 1863.

2.11 WALL-BOX AND CEILING MOUNTED DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472. Compatible with LED driver.

2.12 PHOTOELECTRIC AND DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS

A. System Description: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed.

1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:

a. When no daylight is present (target level). b. When significant daylight is present.

2. System programming is done with two hand-held, remote-control tools.

a. Initial setup tool. b. Tool for occupants to adjust the target levels by increasing the set point up to 25

percent, or by minimizing the electric lighting level.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate controller unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.


2. Sensor Output: 0- to 10-V dc to operate electronic dimming ballasts. Sensor is powered by controller unit.

3. Power Pack: Sensor has 24-V dc, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 4. Light-Level Sensor Set-Point Adjustment Range: 20 to 60 fc (120 to 640 lux).

2.13 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.





1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick steel with chrome-plated finish. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.14 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular solid brass with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

2.15 Specify final FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Contracting Officer Technical Representative (COTR)] unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.



4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

F. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


262816 -1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded-case switches. 7. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.



2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01730 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.




A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents when required by the Contracting Officer (CO).



1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Contracting (CO) no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without CO’s written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.



1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. <

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac .

2.2 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 3. Littelfuse, Inc.










B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position. 1. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and

closed. 2. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

I. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).







J. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 5. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 6. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4Xstainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260529 "Hangers and supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.



3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.





1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.



2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.



263600 - 1 TRANSFER SWITCHES

SECTION 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes generator tap box with manual transfer switch rated 600 V and less, Posi-Max PDP with a 4 pole manual transfer switch (required Government/Base Standard equipment). 1. Combination portable generator tap-box and 4 pole manual transfer switch.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum

clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show overall product dimensions: height, width, depth, front and

side elevation, line and load connection details, conduit entry and exit location(s), assembly ratings (including: short-circuit, continuous current/amperage, voltage rating) , UL listing of each component and assembly.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices and their installation requirements.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01730 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain manual transfer switch and combination generator tap box- manual

transfer switch (Posi-max PDP) from a single manufacturer, UL labeled as a complete assembly.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Comply with NEC 520.53(K) and 530.22(A)Comply with NFPA 110.

G. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

H. Provide with quick access cable entry door.

I. Provide with Lockout capability for safety and security.

J. Comply with NEC 520.53(K) and 530.22(A).

K. Transfer switch shall be UL or equal testing/listing agency approved


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:

1. Notify Contracting Officer (CO) no fewer than five days in advance of proposed

interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without CO’s or other government

approved inspector’s written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Transfer Switches Using Molded-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following available manufacturers or equal offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. AC Data Systems, Inc. b. Eaton c. GE Zenith Controls. d. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc. e. Lake Shore Electric Corporation.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective

devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip

unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location. 2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

C. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide.

D. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and other units indicated, shall be provided with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within enclosure to control heater.

F. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings,

either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring

indicated. 2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for bottom entrance of

feeder conductors as indicated.



G. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 3R, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION

A. Ratings: 1. Voltage and amperage: as indicated on the drawings. 2. Short circuit withstand: 42,000A

B. Color coded polarity sequential port interlock connection

C. Color coded polarity label/marking for easy recognition of mating plug.

D. Color coded polarity sequential port interlock connection

E. Manufacturer recommended covers to unused connector receptacles.

F. Data plate style placard, permanently attached, using sheet metal screws or rivets, adjacent to the connections (s), placard reads: “DANGER UNUSED CONNECTOR RECEPTACLES ARE ENERGIZED DURING GENERATOR OPERATION. EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION. PROPER PPE REQUIRED WHEN MAKING CONNECTIONS

2.4

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-

resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Verify that sequential port interlock, disconnects each plug in the proper sequence

ensuring ground connection. e. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for

each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Government's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Section 01730 "Operation and Maintenance Data (paragraph 1.9 – Instruction of Government and the Installation’s Personnel)". Provide government’s maintenance training to adjust, operate and maintain transfer switches and related equipment 11 months after date of first training.



264113 - 1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

SECTION 264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for structures and structure elements.

B. Drawing and Specification is for planning purposes only. Provide full Lightning Protection System Design for Buckley AFB ASE Maintenance and Storage Facility by a Lightning Protection System Engineer.



B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or certification by UL.

B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing material.


D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

E. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features, including the following:



1. Ground rods. 2. Ground loop conductor.


A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL or LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class Icopper unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Harger. d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. e. Independent Protection Co. f. Preferred Lightning Protection. g. Robbins Lightning, Inc. h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.











2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches (600 mm) Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.

3. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in roofing Sections.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper.

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

E. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter by 10 feet (3 m) long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96AandNFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors: 1. Down conductors. 2. Interior conductors. 3. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of

building.

D. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

E. Ground Loop: Install ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the perimeter of structure.

1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building foundation. 2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop. 3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet (3.6 m) of

grade level.

3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."



3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Contracting Officer Technical Representative at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. Provide Contracting Officer (CO) a copy of all UL inspection list, test results and UL inspection corrective action list/documentation provided to obtain UL Master Label.



265100 -1 INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and drivers/ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. 3. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

C. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

D. CRI: Color-rendering index.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include

data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Energy-efficiency data. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.



5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Ceiling-mounted projectors. 4. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 5. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels. g. Photocells

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of driver and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from

manufacturer.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.




A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents when required by Contracting Officer. 1. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 50 of each type and rating installed. Furnish

at least one of each type. 2. LED driver: One for every 30 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type. 3. Globes and Guards: One for every 20of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product or equal of luminaires

shown in Luminaire Schedule Sheet EL601. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent

warping and sagging.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

E. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm minimum unless otherwise indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

F. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended LED, LED drivers, lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

G. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.



2.3 EMERGENCY LED POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body or installed remote and compatible with LED driver. Comply with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,

luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with

UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.



2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount

a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

D. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm.

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Contracting Officer (CO), to use

permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Remote Mounting of LED Drivers: Distance between the LED driver and fixture shall not

exceed that recommended by LED driver manufacturer. Verify, with LED driver manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension

devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:



1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

F. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply

with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements

in NFPA 101.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by Contracting Officer within 12 months of date of

Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting focused luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust focused luminaires in the presence of Contracting Officer.



265600 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with LED lamps.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 265100 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast/driver housing if provided.


A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings (or equal) available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.



K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

O. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

B. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

a. IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting Installations."

b. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations." c. IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations." d. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." e. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.



280513-1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC

SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

SECTION 280513 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, all of Division 27, and Division 28 apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal UTP cabling. 2. UTP Cable Hardware 3. Optical Fiber Cable 4. Optical Fiber Cable Hardware 5. Cable for Access Control System. 6. RS-485 cable 7. Identification products.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 28, Section 281300 Access Control.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

E. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.






1. Include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field personnel.

B. Source quality-control reports.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber flashlight.

2. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 4. Test each conductor of a multi-conductor cable for opens and shorts.


A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, multi-conductor cables, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and




temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches or as specified.

2.3 HORIZONTAL UTP CABLE

A. Utilize Category 6 cabling: 1. Single 4-pair, Category 6, unshielded twisted pairs, 23 gauge, bare copper, polyethylene

insulated conductors, with overall YELLOW flame retardant jacket, PLENUM rated.

B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Hitachi Cable Manchester Supra 660 2. Belden

C. Other approved equal submitted in advance as required in Scope of Work.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

B. Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 20 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.




2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. Single-mode Fiber Optic Outlet Cable - Provide horizontal fiber optic cable from outlet through conduits to cable tray then through cable tray to TR or ER.

1. Each single-mode fiber optic cable shall be a MIC type tight buffered fiber. Typical fiber

outlets consist of a two-strand fan-out type. Number of strands may vary depending on project.

B. Multimode Fiber Optic Outlet Cable - Provide horizontal fiber optic cable from outlet through conduits to cable tray then through cable tray to TR or ER.

1. Each multimode fiber optic cable shall be a MIC type tight buffered fiber. Typical fiber

outlets consist of a two-strand fan-out type fiber. Number of strands may vary depending on project.

C. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Hitachi Cable Manchester 2. Other approved equal submitted in advance as required in Scope of Work.

2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3.

1. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC, Type LC, connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.

2. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.7 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.




3. Unshielded. 4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.8 CABLE FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The cabling for the access control system shall be a composite cable constructed of four (4) individually jacketed multi-conductor cables surrounded by a vibrant yellow jacket printed with system and application, i.e., “Access Control Cable”, sequential foot markers, and a device or zone alpha numeric coding system designation. The overall jacket and individual cables shall be manufactured of a polymer alloy. The cable shall contain a rip cord for stripping back the jacket.

B. Individually jacketed cables within the composite cable shall be constructed to specifically support power and communications to access control devices. The interior cable’s purpose shall be easily identified and constructed as follows:

1. Interior Cable 1:

a. Jacket: White with purple stripe, low smoke PVC, plenum b. Shield: Not Applicable c. Drain: Not Applicable d. Conductor: 18 AWG, 4-conductor stranded bare copper, non-shielded e. Labeling: Conductor gauge, number of conductors, application (Lock Power)

and sequential alpha numeric coding system. f. Conductor color coding: Black, Red, White, Green g. Temperature Rating: 75°C h. Voltage Rating: 300V

2. Interior Cable 2: a. Jacket: White with yellow stripe, low smoke PVC, plenum b. Shield: Overall Aluminum Polyester Foil – 100% coverage c. Drain: 24 AWG, 7-strand tinned copper d. Conductor: 22 AWG, 3-pair stranded bare copper e. Labeling: conductor gauge, number of conductors, application (Card Reader) f. and sequential alpha numeric coding system. g. Conductor color coding: Black/Red, White/Green, Orange/Brown h. Temperature Rating: 75°C i. Voltage Rating: 300V

3. Interior Cable 3: a. Jacket: White with green stripe, low smoke PVC, plenum b. Shield: Not Applicable c. Drain: Not Applicable d. Conductor: 22 AWG, 2-conductor stranded bare copper e. Labeling: conductor gauge, number of conductors, application (Door Contact) f. and sequential alpha numeric coding system. g. Conductor color coding: Black/Red h. Temperature Rating: 75°C i. Voltage Rating: 300V

4. Interior Cable 4:




a. Jacket: White with red stripe, low smoke PVC, plenum b. Shield: Not Applicable c. Drain: Not Applicable d. Conductor: 22 AWG, 4-conductor stranded bare copper e. Labeling: conductor gauge, number of conductors, application (REX/SPARE) f. and sequential alpha numeric coding system. g. Conductor color coding: Black, Red, White, Green h. Temperature Rating: 75°C i. Voltage Rating: 300V

C. The composite cable shall be approved for plenum use without conduit per NEC Article 800 and 725.

D. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Basis of Design: Windy City Wire Security/Access SmartWire Part #446100 2. Belden 3. Commscope 4. Other approved equal submitted in advance as required in Scope of Work.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-C.2.

D. Factory test single mode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-7 and TIA-526-14A for multimode.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. All cables shall be placed in conduit pathways. All supports rated for Category 6 structured cabling system. In a ceiling distribution design a minimum of 8" clearance between ceiling tile and cable should be maintained. All hangers and supports must be suspended from or attached to the structural ceiling or walls with hardware designed to support their load bearing rating. Only Velcro type cable ties shall be used for dressing or securing Category 6 Cabling in racks or within the Telecom Room.

3.2 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.

1. Minimum conduit size shall be 1” inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by

manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure

associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. 6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal

blocks, or plug connectors.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.

B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 2. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 5’ and

not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.




3. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

E. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3. 2. Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

F. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in communications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches




4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches

5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. In compliance with an approved through-penetration firestop system in accordance with local AHJ

3.5 GROUNDING

A. For communication wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM's "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection.




a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:

a. A 100% verification by Government of all horizontal fiber cable tests will be performed. Contractor shall notify the Government before the start of testing. Contractor may request Government to accompany them in the testing of cables to ensure proper information entry into the test instrument. If Government personnel accompany the Contractor on testing, verification shall not be performed.

b. The fiber optic cables shall be tested utilizing a power meter and stabilized light source capable of testing at 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode and 1310nm and 1550nm for single-mode. Contractor shall complete a fiber optic post installation report at the time of testing containing meter readings at both 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode and 1310nm and 1550nm for single-mode in one direction (TR to outlet) on each fiber, actual loss and other pertinent data regarding the cables tested, including model and serial number of test equipment, cable part #, installed fiber length, building span loss at 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode and 1310nm and 1550nm for single-mode and date tested. Testing required is 100%. Place in a 3-ring binder, preceded by a tabbed divider and label as “Horizontal Fiber”. Span loss calculations are required on the final test sheet for loss at 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode and 1310nm and 1550nm for single mode.

(D x L) + (C x # connectors)

D = Length; L = Loss; C = Connector loss (Max 0.75 dB)

1 ft. = .0003048 km.

Government will perform random verification testing as part of acceptance of all fiber optic cable testing.

c. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Provide manufacturer Warranty of all installed equipment of no less than 5 years.



281300 - 1 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

SECTION 281300 ACCESS CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Security access central-control station. 2. One or more security access networked workstations. 3. Security access operating system and application software. 4. Security access controllers connected to high-speed electronic-data transmission network.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity.

B. DTS: Digital Termination Service. A microwave-based, line-of-sight communication provided directly to the Government.

C. Identifier: A credential card, keypad personal identification number or code, biometric characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-control database for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

D. Location: A Location on the network having a PC-to-controller communications link, with additional Controllers at the Location connected to the PC-to-controller link with TIA 485-A communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

E. PCI Bus: Peripheral Component Interconnect. A peripheral bus providing a high-speed data path between the CPU and peripheral devices such as monitor, disk drive, or network.

F. RAS: Remote access services.

G. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets a graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program, activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Comply with SIA BIO-01.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Diagrams for cable management system.



2. System labeling schedules. 3. Wiring diagrams. 4. Cable administration drawings. 5. Battery and charger calculations for central station, workstations, and controllers.




A. Operation and maintenance data include the following:

1. Software documentation. 2. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all

installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC.

3. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

4. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.



B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

C. Comply with SIA DC-07.


A. Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 60 to 85 deg F (16 to 30 deg C) and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, non-condensing.

2. Indoor, Controlled Environment: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. System components, except central-station control unit, installed in temperature-controlled indoor environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 36 to 122 deg F (2 to 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

3. Indoor, Uncontrolled Environment: NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosures. System components installed in non-temperature-controlled indoor environments shall be rated



for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 0 to 122 deg F (minus 18 to plus 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Existing Buckley AFB Vindicator Access control system (Sole Source requirement)

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Note that the existing access control system will be expanded. Contractor shall provide the following subject to compliance with requirements:

1. Existing Buckley AFB Vindicator Access control system (Sole Source requirement).

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The existing access control system (ACS), will be expanded. Components, i.e., controllers, reader, and input/output modules shall be compatible with the existing system. The ACS shall consist of one or more networked PC-based workstations, field-installed controllers, connected by a high-speed electronic-data transmission network.

B. System Software: Based on existing Buckley AFB system, will be V5 ACS Network Security Application-Version 3.2, Release 23, based on 64-bit Windows 7, central-station, workstation operating system, server operating system, and application software. Software shall have the following capabilities:

1. Graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format that complies with interface guidelines of Microsoft Windows.

2. System license for the entire system including capability for future additions that are within the indicated system size limits specified in this Section.

3. Open-architecture system that allows importing and exporting of data and interfacing with other systems that are compatible with Microsoft Windows.

4. Password-protected operator login and access. 5. Open-database-connectivity compliant.

C. Network(s) connecting PCs and controllers shall consist of one or more of the following:

1. Local area, IEEE 802.3 Gigabit-Ethernet, star topology network based on TCP/IP.

2.3 OPERATION

A. Security access system shall use a single database for access-control and credential-creation functions.




B. Distributed Processing: A fully distributed processing system.

1. Access-control information, including time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data, shall be downloaded to controllers so each controller can make access-control decisions.

2. Intermediate controllers for access control are prohibited. 3. In the event that communications with the central controller are lost, controllers shall

automatically buffer event transactions until communications are restored, at which time buffered events shall be uploaded to the central station.

C. Number of Locations:

1. Support at least 32,000 separate Locations using a single PC with combinations of direct-connect or TCP/IP LAN connections to each Location.

2. Each Location shall have its own database and history in the central station. 3. Locations may be combined to share a common database.

D. Data Capacity:

1. 130 different card-reader formats. 2. 999 comments. 3. 48 graphic file types for importing maps.

E. Location Capacity:

1. 128 reader-controlled doors. 2. 50,000 total-access credentials. 3. 2048 supervised alarm inputs. 4. 2048 programmable outputs. 5. 32,000 custom action messages per Location to instruct operator on action required when

alarm is received.

F. System Network Requirements:

1. System components shall be interconnected and shall provide automatic communication of status changes, commands, field-initiated interrupts, and other communications required for proper system operation.

2. Communication shall not require operator initiation or response and shall return to normal after partial- or total-network interruption such as power loss or transient upset.

3. System shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator and shall identify the communications link that has experienced a partial or total failure.

4. Communications controller may be used as an interface between the central-station display systems and the field device network. Communications controller shall provide functions required to attain the specified network communications performance.

G. Central station shall provide operator interface, interaction, display, control, and dynamic and real-time monitoring. Central station shall control system networks to interconnect all system components, including workstations and field-installed controllers.

H. Field equipment shall include controllers, sensors, and controls.



1. Controllers shall serve as an interface between the central station and sensors and controls.

2. Data exchange between the central station and the controllers shall include down-line transmission of commands, software, and databases to controllers.

3. The up-line data exchange from the controller to the central station shall include status data such as intrusion alarms, status reports, and entry-control records.

4. Controllers are classified as alarm-annunciation or entry-control type.

I. System Response to Alarms: Field device network shall provide a system end-to-end response time of one second(s) or less for every device connected to the system.

J. False-Alarm Reduction: The design of the central station and controllers shall contain features to reduce false alarms. Equipment and software shall comply with SIA CP-01.

K. Error Detection:

1. Use a cyclic code method to detect single- and double-bit errors, burst errors of eight bits or fewer, and at least 99 percent of all other multibit and burst errors between controllers and the central station.

2. Interactive or product error-detection codes alone will not be acceptable.

L. Data Line Supervision: System shall initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines.

M. Door Hardware Interface:

1. Comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware required to be monitored or controlled by the security access system.

2. Electrical characteristics of controllers shall match the signal and power requirements of door hardware.

2.4 APPLICATION SOFTWARE

A. System Software: Based on existing Buckley AFB system, will be V5 ACS Network Security Application-Version 3.2, Release 23, based on 64-bit Windows 7, Microsoft Windows central-station and workstation operating system and application software.

1. Graphical user interface shall show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format. 2. Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits. 3. Open architecture that allows importing and exporting of data and interfacing with other

systems that are compatible with operating system. 4. Password-protected operator login and access.

B. Application Software: Interface between the alarm annunciation and entry-control controllers to monitor sensors, operate displays, report alarms, generate reports, and help train system operators.

1. Reside at the central station, workstations, and controllers as required to perform specified functions.

2. Operate and manage peripheral devices.



3. Manage files for disk I/O, including creating, deleting, and copying files; and automatically maintain a directory of all files, including size and location of each sequential and random-ordered record.

4. Import custom icons into graphics to represent alarms and I/O devices. 5. Globally link I/O so that any I/O can link to any other I/O within the same Location

without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at the controller. 6. Globally code I/O links so that any access-granted event can link to any I/O with the

same Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at the controller.

7. Messages from PC to controllers and controllers to controllers shall be on a polled network that utilizes check summing and acknowledgment of each message. Communication shall be automatically verified, buffered, and retransmitted if message is not acknowledged.

8. Selectable poll frequency and message time-out settings shall handle bandwidth and latency issues for TCP/IP, RF, and other PC-to-controller communications methods by changing the polling frequency and the amount of time the system waits for a response.

9. Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history backups shall be automatically stored at the central-control PC and encrypted with a nine-character alphanumeric password that must be used to restore or read data contained in backup.

10. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to database and system software.

11. Support network protocol and topology, TCP/IP, Novel Netware, Digital Pathworks, Banyan Vines, LAN/WAN, and RAS.

C. Workstation Software:

1. Password levels shall be individually customized at each workstation to allow or disallow operator access to program functions for each Location.

2. Workstation event filtering shall allow user to define events and alarms that will be displayed at each workstation. If an alarm is unacknowledged (not handled by another workstation) for a preset amount of time, the alarm will automatically appear on the filtered workstation.

D. Controller Software:

1. Controllers shall operate as autonomous, intelligent processing units.

a. Controllers shall make decisions about access control, alarm monitoring, linking functions, and door-locking schedules for their operation, independent of other system components.

b. Controllers shall be part of a fully distributed processing-control network. c. The portion of the database associated with a controller, and consisting of

parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of points connected to that controller, shall be maintained in the controller.

2. The following functions shall be fully implemented and operational within each controller:

a. Monitoring inputs. b. Controlling outputs. c. Automatically reporting alarms to the central station.



d. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station on request. e. Maintaining real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a

day. f. Communicating with the central station. g. Executing controller resident programs. h. Diagnosing. i. Downloading and uploading data to and from the central station.

3. Controller Operations at a Location:

a. Up to 64 controllers connected to TIA 485-A communications loop. Globally operating I/O linking and anti-passback functions between controllers within the same Location without central-station or workstation intervention. Linking and anti-passback shall remain fully functional within the same Location even when the central station or workstations are off-line.

b. In the event of communication failure between the central station and a Location, there shall be no degradation in operations at the controllers at that Location. Controllers at each Location shall be connected to a memory buffer with a capacity to store up to 10,000 events; there shall be no loss of transactions in system history files until the buffer overflows.

c. Buffered events shall be handled in a first-in-first-out mode of operation.

4. Individual Controller Operation:

a. Controllers shall transmit alarms, status changes, and other data to the central station when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not available, controllers shall function in a stand-alone mode; operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station, shall be stored for later transmission to the central station. Storage capacity for the latest 1024 events shall be provided at each controller.

b. Card-reader ports of a controller shall be custom configurable for at least 120 different card-reader or keypad formats. Multiple reader or keypad formats may be used simultaneously at different controllers or within the same controller.

c. Controllers shall provide a response to card readers or keypad entries in less than 0.25 seconds, regardless of system size.

d. Controllers that are reset, or powered up from a nonpowered state, shall automatically request a parameter download and reboot to their proper working state. This shall happen without any operator intervention.

e. Initial Startup: When controllers are brought on-line, database parameters shall be automatically downloaded to them. After initial download is completed, only database changes shall be downloaded to each controller.

f. On failure for any reason, controllers shall perform an orderly shutdown and force controller outputs to a predetermined failure-mode state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device.

g. After power is restored, following a power failure, startup software shall initiate self-test diagnostic routines, after which controllers shall resume normal operation.

h. After controller failure, if the database and application software are no longer resident, controllers shall not restart but shall remain in the failure mode until repaired. If database and application programs are resident, controllers shall immediately resume operation. If not, software shall be restored automatically from the central station.



5. Communications Monitoring:

a. System shall monitor and report status of TIA 485-A communications loop of each Location.

b. Communication status window shall display which controllers are currently communicating, a total count of missed polls since midnight, and which controller last missed a poll.

c. Communication status window shall show the type of CPU, the type of I/O board, and the amount of RAM memory for each controller.

6. Operating systems shall include a real-time clock function that maintains seconds, minutes, hours, day, date, and month. The real-time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station at least once a day to plus or minus 10 seconds. The time synchronization shall be automatic, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown.

E. PC-to-Controller Communications:

1. Central-station or workstation communications shall use the following:

a. Direct connection using serial ports of the PC. b. TCP/IP LAN interface cards.

2. Each serial port used for communications shall be individually configurable for "direct communications," "modem communications incoming and outgoing," or "modem communications incoming only," or as an ASCII output port. Serial ports shall have adjustable data transmission rates and shall be selectable under program control.

3. Use multiport communications board if more than two serial ports are needed.

a. Use a 4-, 8-, or 16-serial port configuration that is expandable to 32 or 64 serial ports.

b. Connect the first board to an internal PCI bus adapter card.

4. Direct serial, TCP/IP, and cable or satellite communications shall be alike in the monitoring or control of system except for the connection that must first be made to a voice-over IP Location.

5. TCP/IP network interface card (NIV) shall have an option to set the poll-frequency and message-response time-out settings.

6. PC-to-controller and controller-to-controller communications (direct or TCP/IP) shall use a polled-communication protocol that checks sum and acknowledges each message. All communications shall be verified and buffered, and retransmitted if not acknowledged.

F. Direct Serial or TCP/IP PC-to-Controller Communications:

1. Communication software on the PC shall supervise the PC-to-controller communications link.

2. Loss of communications to any controller shall result in an alarm at all PCs running the communication software.

3. When communications are restored, all buffered events shall automatically upload to the PC, and any database changes shall be automatically sent to the controller.



G. Controller-to-Controller Communications:

1. TIA 485-A, four-wire, point-to-point, regenerative (repeater) communications network methodology.

2. TIA 485-A communications signal shall be regenerated at each controller.

H. Database Downloads:

1. All data transmissions from PCs to a Location, and between controllers at a Location, shall include a complete database checksum to check the integrity of the transmission. If the data checksum does not match, a full data download shall be automatically retransmitted.

2. If a controller is reset for any reason, it shall automatically request and receive a database download from the PC. The download shall restore data stored at the controller to their normal working state and shall take place with no operator intervention.

I. Operator Interface:

1. Inputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the normal state and one for the abnormal state.

2. When viewing and controlling inputs, displayed icons shall automatically change to the proper icon to display the current system state in real time. Icons shall also display the input's state, whether armed or bypassed, and if the input is in the armed or bypassed state due to a time zone or a manual command.

3. Outputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the secure (locked) state and one for the open (unlocked) state.

4. Icons displaying status of the I/O points shall be constantly updated to show their current real-time condition without prompting by the operator.

5. The operator shall be able to scroll the list of I/Os and press the appropriate toolbar button, or right click, to command the system to perform the desired function.

6. Graphic maps or drawings containing inputs, outputs, and override groups shall include the following:

a. Database to import and store full-color maps or drawings and allow for input, output, and override group icons to be placed on maps.

b. Maps to provide real-time display animation and allow for control of points assigned to them.

c. System to allow inputs, outputs, and override groups to be placed on different maps.

d. Software to allow changing the order or priority in which maps will be displayed.

7. Override Groups Containing I/Os:

a. System shall incorporate override groups that provide the operator with the status and control over user-defined "sets" of I/Os with a single icon.

b. Icon shall change automatically to show the live summary status of points in that group.

c. Override group icon shall provide a method to manually control or set to time-zone points in the group.



d. Override group icon shall allow the expanding of the group to show icons representing the live status for each point in the group, individual control over each point, and the ability to compress the individual icons back into one summary icon.

8. Schedule Overrides of I/Os and Override Groups:

a. To accommodate temporary schedule changes that do not fall within the holiday parameters, the operator shall have the ability to override schedules individually for each input, output, or override group.

b. Each schedule shall be composed of a minimum of two dates with separate times for each date.

c. The first time and date shall be assigned the override state that the point shall advance to when the time and date become current.

d. The second time and date shall be assigned the state that the point shall return to when the time and date become current.

9. Copy command in database shall allow for like data to be copied and then edited for specific requirements, to reduce redundant data entry.

J. Operator Access Control:

1. Control operator access to system controls through three password-protected operator levels. System operators and managers with appropriate password clearances shall be able to change operator levels for operators.

2. Three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their defined level during a 24-hour period shall initiate a software tamper alarm.

3. A minimum of 32 passwords shall be available with the system software. System shall display the operator's name or initials in the console's first field. System shall print the operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on the system printer at login and logoff.

4. The password shall not be displayed or printed. 5. Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following:

a. Selected commands to be usable. b. Access to system software. c. Access to application software. d. Individual zones that are to be accessed. e. Access to database.

K. Operator Commands:

1. Command Input: Plain-language words and acronyms shall allow operators to use the system without extensive training or data-processing backgrounds. System prompts shall be a word, a phrase, or an acronym.

2. Command inputs shall be acknowledged and processing shall start in not less than one second(s).

3. Tasks that are executed by operator's commands shall include the following:

a. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the operator has observed the alarm message.



b. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion-alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone. System shall be structured so that console operator cannot disable tamper circuits.

c. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely activate intrusion-alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone.

d. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system-wide operational test. e. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational test for a specific zone. f. Print reports. g. Change Operator: Used for changing operators. h. Run system tests. i. Generate and format reports. j. Request help with the system operation.

1) Include in main menus. 2) Provide unique, descriptive, context-sensitive help for selections and

functions with the press of one function key. 3) Provide navigation to specific topic from within the first help window. 4) Help shall be accessible outside the application program.

k. Entry-Control Commands:

1) Lock (secure) or unlock (open) each controlled entry and exit up to four times a day through time-zone programming.

2) Arm or disarm each monitored input up to four times a day through time-zone programming.

3) Enable or disable readers or keypads up to two times a day through time-zone programming.

4) Enable or disable cards or codes up to four times a day per entry point through access-level programming.

4. Command Input Errors: Show operator input assistance when a command cannot be executed because of operator input errors. Assistance screen shall use plain-language words and phrases to explain why the command cannot be executed. Error responses that require an operator to look up a code in a manual or other document are not acceptable. Conditions causing operator assistance messages include the following:

a. Command entered is incorrect or incomplete. b. Operator is restricted from using that command. c. Command addresses a point that is disabled or out of service. d. Command addresses a point that does not exist. e. Command is outside the system's capacity.

L. Alarms:

1. System Setup:

a. Assign manual and automatic responses to incoming-point status change or alarms. b. Automatically respond to input with a link to other inputs, outputs, or operator-

response plans; unique sound with use of WAV files; and maps or images that graphically represent the point location.

c. Sixty-character message field for each alarm.



d. Operator-response-action messages shall allow message length of at least 65,000 characters, with database storage capacity of up to 32,000 messages. Setup shall assign messages to sensors.

e. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for printing to provide further information and shall be editable by the operator.

f. Allow 25 secondary messages with a field of four lines of 60 characters each. g. Store the most recent 1000 alarms for recall by the operator using the report

generator.

2. Software Tamper:

a. Annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized changes to system database files are attempted. Three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to log onto system shall generate a software tamper alarm.

b. Annunciate a software tamper alarm when an operator or other individual makes three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to invoke functions beyond their authorization level.

c. Maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands entered at each central station to serve as an audit trail. System shall not allow write access to system transcript files by any person, regardless of their authorization level.

d. Allow only acknowledgment of software tamper alarms.

3. Read access to system transcript files shall be reserved for operators with the highest password authorization level available in system.

4. Animated Response Graphics: Highlight alarms with flashing icons on graphic maps; display and constantly update the current status of alarm inputs and outputs in real time through animated icons.

5. Alarm Handling: Each input may be configured so that an alarm cannot be cleared unless it has returned to normal, with options of requiring the operator to enter a comment about disposition of alarm. Allow operator to silence alarm sound when alarm is acknowledged.

M. Alarm Monitoring: Monitor sensors, controllers, and DTS circuits and notify operators of an alarm condition. Display higher-priority alarms first and, within alarm priorities, display the oldest unacknowledged alarm first. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall not be considered acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms.

1. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary alarm messages.

2. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, date and time (to nearest second) of occurrence, and operator responses.

3. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for each input assigned to that map if that option is selected for that input location.

4. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the following two handling steps by operators:

a. First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action shall silence sounds associated with the alarm. The alarm remains in the system "Acknowledged" but "Un-Resolved."

b. Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution or operator comment, giving the disposition of the alarm event. The alarm shall then clear.



5. Each alarm point shall be programmable to disallow the resolution of alarms until the alarm point has returned to its normal state.

6. Alarms shall transmit to central station in real time. 7. Alarms shall be displayed and managed from a minimum of four different windows.

a. Input Status Window: Overlay status icon with a large red blinking icon. Selecting the icon will acknowledge the alarm.

b. History Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red text. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.

c. Alarm Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.

d. Graphic Map Display: Display a steady colored icon representing each alarm input location. Change icon to flashing red when the alarm occurs. Change icon from flashing red to steady red when the alarm is acknowledged.

8. Once an alarm is acknowledged, the operator shall be prompted to enter comments about the nature of the alarm and actions taken. Operator's comments may be manually entered or selected from a programmed predefined list, or a combination of both.

9. For locations where there are regular alarm occurrences, provide programmed comments. Selecting that comment shall clear the alarm.

10. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and resolved the alarm shall be recorded in the database.

11. Identical alarms from the same alarm point shall be acknowledged at the same time the operator acknowledges the first alarm. Identical alarms shall be resolved when the first alarm is resolved.

12. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading, retrieving, and updating database from workstations and controllers.

13. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the corresponding alarm point shall be automatically bypassed.

N. Monitor Display: Display text and graphic maps that include zone status integrated into the display. Colors are used for the various components and current data. Colors shall be uniform throughout the system.

1. Color Code:

a. FLASHING RED: Alerts operator that a zone has gone into an alarm or that primary power has failed.

b. STEADY RED: Alerts operator that a zone is in alarm and alarm has been acknowledged.

c. YELLOW: Advises operator that a zone is in access. d. GREEN: Indicates that a zone is secure and that power is on.

2. Graphics:

a. Support 32,000 graphic display maps and allow import of maps from a minimum of 16 standard formats from another drawing or graphics program.

b. Allow I/O to be placed on graphic maps by the drag-and-drop method. c. Operators shall be able to view the inputs, outputs, and the point's name by moving

the mouse cursor over the point on graphic map.



d. Inputs or outputs may be placed on multiple graphic maps. The operator shall be able to toggle to view graphic map associated with I/Os.

e. Each graphic map shall have a display-order sequence number associated with it to provide a predetermined order when toggled to different views.

f. Camera icons shall have the ability to be placed on graphic maps that, when selected by an operator, will open a video window, display the camera associated with that icon, and provide pan-tilt-zoom control.

g. Input, output, or camera placed on a map shall allow the ability to arm or bypass an input, open or secure an output, or control the pan-tilt-zoom function of the selected camera.

O. System test software enables operators to initiate a test of the entire system or of a particular portion of the system.

1. Test Report: The results of each test shall be stored for future display or printout. The report shall document the operational status of system components.

P. Report Generator Software: Include commands to generate reports for displaying, printing, and storing on disk and tape. Reports shall be stored by type, date, and time. Report printing shall be the lowest-priority activity. Report-generation mode shall be operator selectable but set up initially as periodic, automatic, or on request. Include time and date printed and the name of operator generating the report. Report formats may be configured by operators.

1. Automatic Printing: Setup shall specify, modify, or inhibit the report to be generated; the time the initial report is to be generated; the time interval between reports; the end of period; and the default printer.

2. Printing on Request: An operator may request a printout of any report. 3. Alarm Reports: Reporting shall be automatic as initially set up. Include alarms recorded

by system over the selected time and information about the type of alarm ) such as door alarm, intrusion alarm, tamper alarm, etc.), the type of sensor, the location, the time, and the action taken.

4. Access and Secure Reports: Document zones placed in access, the time placed in access, and the time placed in secure mode.

5. Custom Reports: Reports tailored to exact requirements of who, what, when, and where. As an option, custom report formats may be stored for future printing.

6. Automatic History Reports: Named, saved, and scheduled for automatic generation. 7. Cardholder Reports: Include data, or selected parts of the data, as well as the ability to be

sorted by name, card number, imprinted number, or by any of the user-defined fields. 8. Cardholder by Reader Reports: Based on who has access to a specific reader or group of

readers by selecting the readers from a list. 9. Cardholder by Access-Level Reports: Display everyone that has been assigned to the

specified access level. 10. Panel Labels Reports: Printout of control-panel field documentation including the actual

location of equipment, programming parameters, and wiring identification. Maintain system installation data within system database so that they are available on-site at all times.

11. History Reports: Custom reports that allows the operator to select any date, time, event type, device, output, input, operator, Location, name, or cardholder to be included or excluded from the report.

a. Initially store history on the hard disk of the host PC.



b. Permit viewing of the history on workstations or print history to any system printer.

c. The report shall be definable by a range of dates and times with the ability to have a daily start and stop time over a given date range.

d. Each report shall depict the date, time, event type, event description, and device; or I/O name, cardholder group assignment, and cardholder name or code number.

e. Each line of a printed report shall be numbered to ensure that the integrity of the report has not been compromised.

f. Total number of lines of the report shall be given at the end of the report. If the report is run for a single event such as "Alarms," the total shall reflect how many alarms occurred during that period.

12. Reports shall have the following four options:

a. View on screen. b. Print to system printer. Include automatic print spooling and "Print To" options if

more than one printer is connected to system. c. "Save to File" with full path statement. d. System shall have the ability to produce a report indicating status of system inputs

and outputs or of inputs and outputs that are abnormal, out of time zone, manually overridden, not reporting, or in alarm.

13. Custom Code List Subroutine: Allow the access codes of system to be sorted and printed according to the following criteria:

a. Active, inactive, or future activate or deactivate. b. Code number, name, or imprinted card number. c. Group, Location, access levels. d. Start and stop code range. e. Codes that have not been used since a selectable number of days. f. In, out, or either status. g. Codes with trace designation.

14. The reports of system database shall allow options so that every data field may be printed.

15. The reports of system database shall be constructed so that the actual position of the printed data shall closely match the position of the data on the data-entry windows.

Q. Anti-Passback:

1. System shall have global and local anti-passback features, selectable by Location. System shall support hard and soft anti-passback.

2. Hard Anti-Passback: Once a credential holder is granted access through a reader with one type of designation (IN or OUT), the credential holder may not pass through that type of reader designation until the credential holder passes through a reader of opposite designation.

3. Soft Anti-Passback: Should a violation of the proper IN or OUT sequence occur, access shall be granted, but a unique alarm shall be transmitted to the control station, reporting the credential holder and the door involved in the violation. A separate report may be run on this event.



4. Timed Anti-Passback: A controller capability that prevents an access code from being used twice at the same device (door) within a user-defined amount of time.

5. Provide four separate zones per Location that can operate without requiring interaction with the host PC (done at controller). Each reader shall be assignable to one or all four anti-passback zones. In addition, each anti-passback reader can be further designated as "Hard," "Soft," or "Timed" in each of the four anti-passback zones. The four anti-passback zones shall operate independently.

6. The anti-passback schemes shall be definable for each individual door. 7. The Master Access Level shall override anti-passback. 8. System shall have the ability to forgive (or reset) an individual credential holder or the

entire credential-holder population anti-passback status to a neutral status.

R. Visitor Assignment:

1. Provide for and allow an operator to be restricted to only working with visitors. The visitor badging subsystem shall assign credentials and enroll visitors. Allow only those access levels that have been designated as approved for visitors.

2. Provide an automated log of visitor name, time and doors accessed, and name of person contacted.

3. Allow a visitor designation to be assigned to a credential holder. 4. Security access system shall be able to restrict the access levels that may be assigned to

credentials issued to visitors. 5. Allow operator to recall visitors' credential-holder file, once a visitor is enrolled in the

system. 6. The operator may designate any reader as one that deactivates the credential after use at

that reader. The history log shall show the return of the credential. 7. System shall have the ability to use the visitor designation in searches and reports.

Reports shall be able to print all or any visitor activity.

S. Training Software: Enables operators to practice system operation including alarm acknowledgment, alarm assessment, response force deployment, and response force communications. System shall continue normal operation during training exercises and shall terminate exercises when an alarm signal is received at the console.

T. Entry-Control Enrollment Software: Database management functions that allow operators to add, delete, and modify access data as needed.

1. The enrollment station shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions. 2. Provide multiple, password-protected access levels. Database management and

modification functions shall require a higher operator access level than personnel enrollment functions.

3. The program shall provide means to disable the enrollment station when it is unattended, to prevent unauthorized use.

4. The program shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry-control database files through enrollment stations. In the case of personnel identity-verification subsystems, this shall include biometric data. Allow entry of personnel identifying information into the system database using menu selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized during setup to suit user and site needs. Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files.



5. Cardholder Data: Provide 99 user-defined fields. System shall have the ability to run searches and reports using any combination of these fields. Each user-defined field shall be configurable, using any combination of the following features:

a. MASK: Determines a specific format with which data must comply. b. REQUIRED: Operator is required to enter data into field before saving. c. UNIQUE: Data entered must be unique. d. DEACTIVATE DATE: Data entered will be evaluated as an additional deactivate

date for all cards assigned to this cardholder. e. NAME ID: Data entered will be considered a unique ID for the cardholder.

6. Personnel Search Engine: A report generator with capabilities such as search by last name, first name, group, or any predetermined user-defined data field; by codes not used in definable number of days; by skills; or by seven other methods.

7. Multiple Deactivate Dates for Cards: User-defined fields to be configured as additional stop dates to deactivate any cards assigned to the cardholder.

8. Batch card printing. 9. Default card data can be programmed to speed data entry for sites where most card data

are similar. 10. Enhanced ACSII File Import Utility: Allows the importing of cardholder data and

images. 11. Card Expire Function: Allows readers to be configured to deactivate cards when a card is

used at selected devices.

2.5 SYSTEM DATABASE

A. Database and database management software shall define and modify each point in database using operator commands. Definition shall include parameters and constraints associated with each system device.

B. Database Operations:

1. System data management shall be in a hierarchical menu-tree format, with navigation through expandable menu branches and manipulated with use of menus and icons in a main menu and system toolbar.

2. Navigational Aids:

a. Toolbar icons for add, delete, copy, print, capture image, activate, deactivate, and muster report.

b. Point and click feature to facilitate data manipulation. c. Next and previous command buttons visible when editing database fields to

facilitate navigation from one record to the next. d. Copy command and copy tool in the toolbar to copy data from one record to create

a new similar record.

3. Data entry shall be automatically checked for duplicate and illegal data and shall be verified for valid format.

4. System shall generate a memo or note field for each item that is stored in database, allowing the storing of information about any defining characteristics of the item. Memo



field is used for noting the purpose for which the item was entered, reasons for changes that were made, and the like.

C. File Management:

1. File management shall include database backup and restoration system, allowing selection of storage media, including 3.5-inch floppy disk, Zip and Jaz drives, and designated network resources.

2. Operations shall be both manual and automatic modes. The number of automatic sequential backups before the oldest backup becomes overwritten; FIFO mode shall be operator selectable.

3. Backup program shall provide manual operation from any PC on the LAN and shall operate while system remains operational.

D. Operator Passwords:

1. Support up to 32,000 individual system operators, each with a unique password. 2. One to eight alphanumeric characters. 3. Allow passwords to be case sensitive. 4. Passwords shall not be displayed when entered. 5. Passwords shall have unique and customizable password profile, and allow several

operators to share a password profile. Include the following features in the password profile:

a. Predetermine the highest-level password profile for access to all functions and areas of program.

b. Allow or disallow operator access to any program operation, including the functions of View, Add, Edit, and Delete.

c. Restrict doors to which an operator can assign access.

6. Operators shall use a user name and password to log on to system. This user name and password shall be used to access database areas and programs as determined by the associated profile.

7. Make provision to allow the operator to log off without fully exiting program. User may be logged off but program will remain running while displaying the login window for the next operator.

E. Access Card/Code Operation and Management: Access authorization shall be by card, by a manually entered code (PIN), or by a combination of both (card plus PIN).

1. Access authorization shall verify the facility code first, the card or card-and-PIN validation second, and the access level (time of day, day of week, date), anti-passback status, and number of uses last.

2. Use data-entry windows to view, edit, and issue access levels. Access-authorization entry-management system shall maintain and coordinate all access levels to prevent duplication or the incorrect creation of levels.

3. Allow assignment of multiple cards/codes to a cardholder. 4. Allow assignment of up to four access levels for each Location to a cardholder. Each

access level may contain any combination of doors. 5. Each door may be assigned four time zones. 6. Access codes may be up to 11 digits in length.



7. Software shall allow the grouping of locations so cardholder data can be shared by all locations in the group.

8. Visitor Access: Issue a visitor badge for data tracking or photo ID purposes without assigning that person a card or code.

9. Cardholder Tracing: Allow for selection of cardholder for tracing. Make a special audible and visual annunciation at control station when a selected card or code is used at a designated code reader. Annunciation shall include an automatic display of the cardholder image.

10. Allow each cardholder to be given either an unlimited number of uses or a number from one to 9999 that regulates the number of times the card can be used before it is automatically deactivated.

11. Provide for cards and codes to be activated and deactivated manually or automatically by date. Provide for multiple deactivate dates to be preprogrammed.

F. Security Access Integration:

1. Photo ID badging and photo verification shall use the same database as the security access and may query data from cardholder, group, and other personal information to build a custom ID badge.

2. Automatic or manual image recall and manual access based on photo verification shall also be a means of access verification and entry.

3. System shall allow sorting of cardholders together by group or other characteristic for a fast and efficient method of reporting on, and enabling or disabling, cards or codes.

G. Operator Comments:

1. With the press of one appropriate button on the toolbar, the user shall be permitted to enter operator comments into the history at anytime.

2. Automatic prompting of operator comment shall occur before the resolution of each alarm.

3. Operator comments shall be recorded by time, date, and operator number. 4. Comments shall be sorted and viewed through reports and history. 5. The operator may enter comments in two ways; either or both may be used:

a. Manually entered through keyboard data entry (typed), up to 65,000 characters per each alarm.

b. Predefined and stored in database for retrieval on request.

6. System shall have a minimum of 999 predefined operator comments with up to 30 characters per comment.

H. Group:

1. Group names may be used to sort cardholders into groups that allow the operator to determine the tenant, vendor, contractor, department, division, or any other designation of a group to which the person belongs.

2. System software shall have the capacity to assign one of 32,000 group names to an access authorization.

3. Make provision in software to deactivate and reactivate all access authorizations assigned to a particular group.

4. Allow sorting of history reports and code list printouts by group name.



I. Time Zones:

1. Each zone consists of a start and stop time for seven days of the week and three holiday schedules. A time zone is assigned to inputs, outputs, or access levels to determine when an input shall automatically arm or disarm, when an output automatically opens or secures, or when access authorization assigned to an access level will be denied or granted.

2. Up to four time zones may be assigned to inputs and outputs to allow up to four arm or disarm periods per day or four lock or unlock periods per day; up to three holiday override schedules may be assigned to a time zone.

3. Data-entry window shall display a dynamically linked bar graph showing active and inactive times for each day and holiday, as start and stop times are entered or edited.

4. System shall have the capacity for 2048 time zones for each Location.

J. Holidays:

1. Three different holiday schedules may be assigned to a time zone. Holiday schedule consists of date in format MM/DD/YYYY and a description. When the holiday date matches the current date of the time zone, the holiday schedule replaces the time-zone schedule for that 24-hour period.

2. System shall have the capacity for 32,000 holidays. 3. Three separate holiday schedules may be applied to a time zone. 4. Holidays have an option to be designated as occurring on the designated date each year.

These holidays remain in system and will not be purged. 5. Holidays not designated to occur each year shall be automatically purged from the

database after the date expires.

K. Access Levels:

1. System shall allow for the creation of up to 32,000 access levels. 2. One level shall be predefined as the Master Access Level. The Master Access Level shall

work at all doors at all times and override any anti-passback. 3. System shall allow for access to be restricted to any area by reader and by time. Access

levels shall determine when and where an Identifier is authorized. 4. System shall be able to create multiple door and time-zone combinations under the same

access level so that an Identifier may be valid during different time periods at different readers even if the readers are on the same controller.

L. User-Defined Fields:

1. System shall provide a minimum of 99 user-defined fields, each with up to 50 characters, for specific information about each credential holder.

2. System shall accommodate a title for each field; field length shall be 20 characters. 3. A "Required" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, forces

the operator to enter data in the user-defined field before the credential can be saved. 4. A "Unique" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, will not

allow duplicate data from different credential holders to be entered. 5. Data format option may be assigned to each user-defined field that will require the data to

be entered with certain character types in specific spots in the field entry window.



6. A user-defined field, if selected, will define the field as a deactivate date. The selection shall automatically cause the data to be formatted with the windows MM/DD/YYYY date format. The credential of the holder will be deactivated on that date.

7. A search function shall allow any one user-defined field or combination of user-defined fields to be searched to find the appropriate cardholder. The search function shall include search for a character string.

8. System shall have the ability to print cardholders based on and organized by the user-defined fields.

2.6 SURGE AND TAMPER PROTECTION

A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entry connection to components.

1. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 specifications

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 specifications and/or as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected.

B. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

2.7 CENTRAL-STATION HARDWARE

A. Central-Station Computer: Not required. Existing.

2.8 CONTROLLERS

A. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit, complying with UL 294, that stores time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data downloaded from the central station or workstation for controlling its operation.

B. Subject to compliance with requirements in this article, manufacturers may use multipurpose controllers.

C. Battery Backup: Sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 4 hours, complying with UL 924.

D. Alarm Annunciation Controller:

1. The controller shall automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network or with dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs.



a. Inputs: Monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. Provides at least eight alarm inputs, which are suitable for wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions.

b. Alarm-Line Supervision:

1) Supervise the alarm lines by monitoring each circuit for changes or disturbances in the signal and for conditions as described in UL 1076 for line security equipment using dc change measurements. System shall initiate an alarm in response to an abnormal current, which is a dc change of 10 percent or more for longer than 500 ms.

2) Transmit alarm-line-supervision alarm to the central station during the next interrogation cycle after the abnormal current condition.

c. Outputs: Managed by central-station software.

2. Auxiliary Equipment Power: A GFI service outlet inside the controller enclosure.

E. Entry-Control Controller:

1. Function: Provide local entry-control functions including one- and two-way communications with access-control devices such as card readers, keypads, biometric personnel identity-verification devices, door strikes, magnetic latches, gate and door operators, and exit push buttons.

a. Operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded database during periods of communication loss between the controller and the field-device network.

b. Accept information generated by the entry-control devices; automatically process this information to determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal:

1) On authentication of the credentials or information presented, check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges.

2) Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, day of week control, group control, and visitor escort control.

c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction. A transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information.

2. Inputs:

a. Data from entry-control devices; use this input to change modes between access and secure.

b. Database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege information.

3. Outputs:



a. Indicate success or failure of attempts to use entry-control devices and make comparisons of presented information with stored identification information.

b. Grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal-control devices. c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction and

transmit transaction records to the central station. d. Door Prop Alarm: If a portal is held open for longer than time scheduled, alarm

sounds.

4. With power supplies sufficient to power at voltage and frequency required for field devices and portal-control devices.

5. Data Line Problems: For periods of loss of communication with the central station, or when data transmission is degraded and generating continuous checksum errors, the controller shall continue to control entry by accepting identifying information, making authentication decisions, checking privileges, and controlling portal-control devices.

a. Store up to 1000 transactions during periods of communication loss between the controller and access-control devices for subsequent upload to the central station on restoration of communication.

6. Controller Power: NFPA 70, Class II power-supply transformer, with 12- or 24-V ac secondary, backup battery and charger.

a. Backup Battery: Premium, valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-calcium battery; spill proof; with a full one-year warranty and a pro rata 9-year warranty. With single-stage, constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life.

b. Backup Battery: Valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-acid battery; spill proof. With single-stage, constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life.

c. Backup Power-Supply Capacity: 240 minutes of battery supply. Submit battery and charger calculations.

d. Power Monitoring: Provide manual, dynamic battery-load test, initiated and monitored at the control center; with automatic disconnection of the controller when battery voltage drops below controller limits. Report by using local controller-mounted digital displays and by communicating status to central station. Indicate normal power on and battery charger on trickle charge. Indicate and report the following:

1) Trouble Alarm: Normal power-off load assumed by battery. 2) Trouble Alarm: Low battery. 3) Alarm: Power off.

2.9 CARD READERS, CREDENTIAL CARDS, AND KEYPADS

A. Card-Reader Power: Powered from its associated controller, including its standby power source, and shall not dissipate more than 5 W.



B. Response Time: Card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal that is sent to the controller. Response time shall be 800 ms or less, from the time the card reader finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated.

C. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:

1. Indoors, controlled environment. 2. Indoors, uncontrolled environment. 3. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold-weather equipment to extend the operating

temperature range as needed for operation at the site.

D. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visual and audible status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on or off, whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected, and whether the door is locked or unlocked.

E. Touch-Plate and Proximity Readers:

1. Active-detection proximity card readers shall provide power to compatible credential cards through magnetic induction, and shall receive and decode a unique identification code number transmitted from the credential card.

2. Passive-detection proximity card readers shall use a swept-frequency, RF field generator to read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits laminated into compatible credential cards. The resonant frequencies read shall constitute a unique identification code number.

3. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from contact to at least 6 inches (150 mm) from the reader.

2.10 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Existing Buckley AFB Access control system or approved compatible equal.

B. Push-Button Switches: Momentary-contact back-lighted push buttons with stainless-steel switch enclosures.

C. Electrical Ratings:

1. Minimum continuous current rating of 10 A at 120-V ac or 5 A at 240-V ac. 2. Contacts that will make 720 VA at 60 A and that will break at 720 VA at 10 A.

D. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush mounting in the switch enclosures.

E. Enclosures shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:





1. Indoors, controlled environment. 2. Indoors, uncontrolled environment. 3. Outdoors.

F. Power: Push-button switches shall be powered from their associated controller, using dc control.

2.11 DOOR AND GATE HARDWARE INTERFACE

A. Exit Device with Alarm: Operation of the exit device shall generate an alarm. Exit device and alarm contacts are specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Exit Alarm: Operation of a monitored door shall generate an alarm. Exit devices and alarm contacts are specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

C. Electric Door Strikes: Use end-of-line resistors to provide power-line supervision. Signal switches shall transmit data to controller to indicate when the bolt is not engaged and the strike mechanism is unlocked, and they shall report a forced entry. Power and signal shall be from the controller. Electric strikes are specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

D. Electromagnetic Locks: End-of-line resistors shall provide power-line supervision. Lock status sensing signal shall positively indicate door is secure. Power and signal shall be from the controller. Electromagnetic locks are specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.12 CABLES

A. General Cable Requirements: Comply with requirements in Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" and as recommended by system manufacturer for integration requirement.

B. PVC-Jacketed, TIA 485-A Cables: Two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, PVC jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMG.

C. Plenum-Type, TIA 485-A Cables:

1. Two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, unshielded, and fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket.

2. NFPA 70, Type CMP. 3. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test.

D. Multiconductor, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. No. 22 AWG, paired and twisted multiple conductors, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, semirigid PVC insulation, overall aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield with 100 percent shield coverage, plus tinned copper braid shield with 65 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket.

2. NFPA 70, Type CMG. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. 4. For TIA 232-F applications.



E. Paired, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. Three pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket.

2. NFPA 70, Type CM. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray.

F. Paired, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. Three pairs, twisted, No. 20 AWG, stranded (7x28) tinned copper conductors, polyethylene (polyolefin) insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG, stranded (19x34) tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket.

2. NFPA 70, Type CM. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray.

G. Paired, Plenum-Type, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. Three pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, plastic insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polypropylene-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket.


H. Multiconductor, Plenum-Type, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. Six conductors, No. 20 AWG, stranded (7x28) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, overall aluminumfoil/polyester-tape shield with 100 percent shield coverage plus tinned copper braid shield with 85 percent shield coverage, and fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket.


I. Paired, Lock Cables:

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket.

2. NFPA 70, Type CMG. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray.

J. Paired, Plenum-Type, Lock Cables:



K. Paired, Lock Cables:




2. NFPA 70, Type CMG. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray.

L. Paired, Plenum-Type, Lock Cables:

1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, unshielded, and plastic jacket.


M. Paired, Input Cables:

1. One pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, overall aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield with No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket.

2. NFPA 70, Type CMR. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1666 riser flame test.

N. Paired, Plenum-Type, Input Cables:

1. One pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield (foil side out), with No. 22 AWG drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and plastic jacket.


O. Paired, AC Transformer Cables:


2. NFPA 70, Type CMG.

P. Paired, Plenum-Type, AC Transformer Cables:

1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, unshielded, and plastic jacket.


Q. Elevator Travel Cables:

1. Steel center core with shielded, twisted pairs, No. 20 AWG conductor size. 2. Steel center core support shall be preformed, flexible, low-torsion, zinc-coated, steel wire

rope; insulated with 60 deg C flame-resistant PVC and covered with a nylon or cotton braid.

3. Shielded pairs shall be insulated copper conductors; color-coded, insulated with 60 deg C flame-resistant PVC; each pair shielded with bare copper braid for 85 percent coverage.

4. Electrical grade, dry jute filler. 5. Helically wound synthetic fiber binder.



6. Rayon or cotton braid applied with 95 percent coverage. 7. 60 deg C PVC jacket specifically compounded for flexibility and abrasion resistance; and

complying with UL VW-1 and CSA FT1 flame rated.

R. LAN Cabling:

1. Comply with requirements in Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

2. NFPA 262.

2.13 TRANSFORMERS

A. NFPA 70, Class II control transformers, NRTL listed. Transformers for security access-control system shall not be shared with any other system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Comply with recommendations in SIA CP-01.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA 606-A, "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure."

C. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access-control system; develop custom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifications and publish as Project planning documents for review and approval.

1. Record setup data for control station and workstations. 2. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access requirements. 3. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for

doors. 4. Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for each controller. 5. Assign action message names and compose messages. 6. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, intruder detection, and video

surveillance features. 7. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps. 8. Develop user-defined fields. 9. Develop screen layout formats. 10. Propose setups for guard tours and key control. 11. Discuss badge layout options; design badges. 12. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification. 13. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration. 14. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test. 15. Develop cable and asset-management system details; input data from construction

documents.



D. In meetings with Government, present Project planning documents and review, adjust, and prepare final setup documents. Use final documents to set up system software.

3.2 CABLING

A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction."

B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

D. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

E. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5E rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and that ensure Category 6 and fiber-optic performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

F. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

G. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location.

3.3 CABLE APPLICATION

A. Comply with TIA 569-B, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces."

B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

C. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4000 ft. (1220 m).

D. Card Readers and Keypads:

1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the functions specified.

2. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire if maximum distance from controller to the reader is 250 ft. (75 m), and install No. 20 AWG wire if maximum distance is 500 ft. (150 m).



3. For greater distances, install "extender" or "repeater" modules recommended by manufacturer of the controller.

4. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw 50 mA or more.

E. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from controller to electrically powered locks. Do not exceed 250 ft. (75 m).

F. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to controller, with a maximum distance of 25 ft. (8 m).

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment."

C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

E. Signal Ground:

1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators. 3. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each

equipment room and wiring closet.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Push Buttons: Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) high text and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller associated with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt, or other facility release device.

B. Install card readers, keypads, push buttons, and biometric readers.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems" and with TIA/EIA 606-B.

B. Using software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article, develop cable administration drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique,



alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement.

C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered within the panel or cabinet.

D. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.7 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform databases tests for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Government.

B. Provide Manufacturer Warranty of no less than 5 years for all installed equipment.





1. LAN Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bidirectional, tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test UTP Category 6 cable according to TIA/EIA 568-C.1, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards - Part 1: General Requirements." Link performance for UTP cables must comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA 568-C.1.

2. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to, measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment.

3. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.



C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Government's operators, management, and security personnel.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Rooms housing the control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall be locked and secured with an activated burglar alarm and access-control system reporting to a central station complying with UL 1610, "Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units," during periods when a qualified operator in the employ of Contractor is not present.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Government's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain security access system. Develop separate training modules for the following:

1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and databases and to update and maintain software.

2. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station and workstations and to enroll personnel.

3. Security personnel. 4. Hardware maintenance personnel. 5. Corporate management.



311000 - 1 SITE CLEARING

SECTION 311000 SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Government's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Contracting Officer.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Contracting Officer.

B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on project

site. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site

clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and

plant-protection measures are in place. E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment.



3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

B. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

D. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Contracting Officer.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction

activity do not enter or cross protection zones. C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction

until permanent vegetation has been established. D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during

removal.



3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Contracting Officer.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place. Coordinate with the Base Civil Engineering prior to utility work.

B. Arrange with utility companies and or utility owner to shut off indicated utilities. C. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by

Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

D. Notify Base and Contracting Officer not less than four days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

E. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Base or Contracting Officer written permission.

F. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 33 Sections.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.

2. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless

further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

C. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or

other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and

shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.



3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Government's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.



312000 -1 EARTH MOVING

SECTION 312000 EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses and plants.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

B. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

C. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

D. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and concrete or hot-mix asphalt paving.

E. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

F. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. G. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes

upward capillary flow of pore water. H. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated.

I. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Contracting Officer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

J. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Contracting Officer. Unauthorized excavation, as



well as remedial work directed by Contracting Officer, shall be without additional compensation.

K. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. L. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,

mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

M. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix

asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

N. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. O. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within buildings.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Utility Location: Utilities are located through the digging permit process. All utilities must

be located before beginning earth moving operations. Reference Specification 1000 General Requirements for dig permit requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to

ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and

PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

D. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.



E. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM C 136; with 100 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Refer to Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) Class 6 Aggregate Base Course.

G. Structural Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with 100 percent passing a 2-inch sieve, 30-100 percent passing a No. 4 sieve, 10-60 percent passing a No. 50 sieve, and not more than 20 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

H. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

I. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or

uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

J. Filter Sand: Washed fine aggregate consistent of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a

combination thereof meeting ASTM C-33. K. Subgrade material (Select Backfill): well graded mixture of sound mineral aggregate

particles containing sufficient, proper quality binding material to secure a firm, stable foundation when placed and compacted. Gradation must be such that 100 percent passes a 3 inch sieve, 80 percent maximum passes a No. 10 sieve, and 15 percent maximum passes a No. 200 sieve.

L. Controlled Low Strength Material: consists of a well-graded mixture of mineral

aggregates, cementitious materials, water and admixtures. Other common names for CLSMs include: flowable fill, flowfill, non-shrink backfill, fly ash fill and controlled density fill. Gradation must be such that 100 percent passes a 1 inch sieve, 50 percent minimum passes a No. 8 sieve, and 0-30 percent passes a No. 200 sieve.

2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations. C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove

temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

B. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch

If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

B. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Over-excavation must be performed as directed by geotechnical report.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,

and subgrades.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe



or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

C. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and

support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

E. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material, 4 inches deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump

truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Contracting Officer, without additional compensation.

3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom

elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Contracting Officer.

B. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Contracting Officer.

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without

intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

B. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding



course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches

of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or

conduit less than 18 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course.

E. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." F. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in to

a height of 8 inches over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches

below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SOIL FILL

A. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so

fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content.



B. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

C. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for

material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations,

and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density

according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material between 93 and 97 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.

3.13 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes.

Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.

C. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch

D. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with

a 10-foot straightedge.



3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as

follows:

1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557.

3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete

slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall be responsible for testing and quality control. Government

will provide quality assurance and will provide additional testing at their discretion. B. Contractor to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with

subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Contracting Officer.

D. When testing reports show that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.



3.17 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion.

Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

D. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash,

and debris, and legally dispose of them off Government property.




Page is intentionally left blank


321216 -1 ASPHALT PAVING

SECTION 321216

ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cold milling of existing asphalt pavement. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 4. Hot-mix asphalt overlay. 5. Pavement-marking paint.


1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, unbound-aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders.

2. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at pavement terminations.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Submit product data for Credit MR 5.1 - Submit location of manufacturing facility including name, address and distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Provide manufacturer's documentation indicating location where the base materials were extracted, mined, quarried, harvested, etc. and the distance between this location and the project site. Also include material costs, excluding costs of installation.




A. Material Certificates: For each paving material Include statement that mixes containing recycled materials will perform equal to mixes produced from all new materials.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Per Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction latest edition.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of CDOT for asphalt paving work.

C. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met:

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. Provide products with an average recycled content of products so post-consumer recycled content plus one half pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 20 percent.

B. Recycled Content - Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.

C. Materials shall be manufactured and harvested, extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

D. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692/D 692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.

E. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.



F. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242/D 242M or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS


B. Recycled Content - Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.

C. Materials shall be manufactured and harvested, extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

D. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320, PG 70-22.

E. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS


B. Materials shall be manufactured and harvested, extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

C. Recycled Materials for Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixes: Reclaimed asphalt pavement; reclaimed, unbound-aggregate base material; and recycled tires, asphalt shingles, or glass from sources and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations, equal to performance of required hot-mix asphalt paving produced from all new materials.

D. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA, and not classified as "restricted use" for locations and conditions of application. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

E. Pavement-Marking Paint: Selected from CDOT Approved Products List (APL).

G. Color: White, Yellow.

2.4 MIXES





C. Recycled Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt: Per CDOT.

1. Surface Course Limit: Recycled content no more than 0 percent by weight.

D. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to CDOT procedures; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

2. Base Course: CDOT 3. Surface Course: CDOT.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling.

B. Mill to a depth of 1-1/2 C. Patch surface depressions deeper than 1 inch after milling, before wearing course is laid.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated or at existing flight line. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces firmly.

C. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated or at existing flight line. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

D. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.



E. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. F. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

G. Placing Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

C. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.

E. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

F. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.4 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

B. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F 1. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls

and tears in asphalt-paving mat. 2. Place on unfrozen surfaces which are free of water, snow, and ice. 3. Place in layers not to exceed 3 inches in depth. 4. Total depth of asphalt section to match depth of removed asphalt.

C. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

D. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.



3.5 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and

resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations."

3.6 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.



3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to

crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.

3.8 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.


A. Testing Agency: The contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

C. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.10 WASTE HANDLING

A. General: Handle asphalt-paving waste according to approved waste management plan required in Section 01520 "Construction Waste Management and Cleanup."


321313 - 1 CONCRETE PAVING

SECTION 321313

CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Curbs and gutters 2. Walks 3. Concrete Pads



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Submit product data for Credit MR 4.1 - For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content (excluding installation).

2. Submit product data for Credit MR 5.1 - Submit location of manufacturing facility including name, address and distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Provide manufacturer's documentation indicating location where the base materials were extracted, mined, quarried, harvested, etc. and the distance between this location and the project site. Also include material costs, excluding costs of installation.

C. Samples: As requested by Contracting Officer.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of products so post-consumer recycled content plus one half pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 20 percent.


C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

E. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

F. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.

G. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.

H. Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars epoxy- coated. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

I. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type I/II

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IP, portland-pozzolan cement.

D. Recycle aggregate meeting gradations shall be no less than 20% of total aggregate volume.

E. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S , uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.



G. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

H. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

I. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

J. Color: As selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry or cotton mats.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

2.5 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than three minutes.

B. Color: As indicated



2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Recycled Content of Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of products so post-consumer recycled content plus one half pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.


C. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi roadway pavement, 3000 psi sidewalk, curb, and other

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: .48 air entrained at 4000 psi and .59 air entrained at 3000 psi.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

2.8 DETECTABLE WARNING PLATES

A. The devices shall comply with the detectable warnings on walking surfaces section of the Americans with Disabilities Act (Title 49 CFR TRANSPORTATION, Part 37.9. STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2 DETECTABLE WARNINGS ON WALKING SURFACES.)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.



3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 3/8-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.

B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, and consolidating concrete.

C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

D. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.



E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

3.6 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

C. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.

D. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

E. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

F. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.

H. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover, curing compound, or a combination of these.



3.8 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch. 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Allow concrete paving to cure for a minimum of 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.

B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Contracting Officer.

B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

3.11 DETECTABLE WARNING PLATES

A. Detectable warning devices shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and in accordance with this specification, or as otherwise specified on the plans and detail sheet. The finished surface shall be uniformly profiled to match the adjoining surfaces without lips, or obstructions and shall drain completely.

B. Detectable warning surfaces shall extend 24 inches minimum in the direction of travel and

the full width of the curb ramp flush surface (generally 48 inches wide).



C. Domes shall be aligned on a squared grid, aligned in rows parallel and perpendicular to the predominant direction of travel. Domes must not be skewed diagonally to the direction of travel.



321373 - 1 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 321373

CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied joint sealants. 2. Hot-applied joint sealants.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, eight Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Pavement-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.

C. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that

are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type NS.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following, with approval:

1. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. 2. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. 3. Per CDOT Approved Products List:

C. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type SL.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following, with approval: 1. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. 2. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL. 3. Per CDOT Approved Products List

E. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.

F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following, with approval:

1. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. 2. Per CDOT Approved Products List











2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 3406.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following, with approval: 1. Per CDOT Approved Products List

C. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: ASTM D 6690, Types I, II, and III.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following 1. Per CDOT Approved Products List

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1,

of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

B. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

2.5 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.

C. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings.





2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

E. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that

allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:

1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and

that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

G. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

H. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.



328400-1 PLANTING IRRIGATION

SECTION 328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Piping. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Manual valves. 4. Pressure-reducing valves. 5. Automatic control valves. 6. Automatic drain valves. 7. Transition fittings. 8. Dielectric fittings. 9. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 10. Sprinklers. 11. Quick couplers. 12. Drip irrigation specialties. 13. Controllers. 14. Boxes for automatic control valves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Lateral Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.

B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.

C. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Design and furnish all work and materials, appliances, tool, equipment, facilities, transportation, and services necessary for and incidental to perform all operations in connection with the complete design and installation of Landscape Irrigation.

B. The Work of the Section shall be coordinated with all underground utilities and trades responsible for their installation.



C. Contractor shall supply and install new tap as required. Contractor shall coordinate with Contracting Officer to determine the location and size of the tap required for the irrigation system.

D. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves.

E. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated.

F. Delegated Design: Design 100 percent coverage irrigation system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Irrigation system shall provide optimum moisture levels to all landscape areas within limits of construction. Drip irrigation shall be used for all tree and shrub plantings. Rotors and pop-up heads may be used for sodded and seeded areas. Most dryland grass areas require only temporary irrigation as is required to ensure establishment and proper lush growth. All dryland grass areas at each building perimeter require permanent irrigation by rotor and/or spray heads around the entire building at the turf edge.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Irrigation Design Plans: Contractor shall submit complete irrigation plans, details and specifications for all planted, sodded and seeded areas. Irrigation Plans shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect and the Contracting Officer for review and obtain required approval prior to proceeding with the installation.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

C. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For irrigation systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Coordination Drawings: Irrigation systems, drawn to scale, on which components are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. Also include adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. LEED Submittals: Refer to Section 01800 “Sustainable Design Measures” for additional LEED submittal requirements. Contractor shall provide LEED submittals corresponding to each LEED Credit claimed and provide documentation per Section 01800, paragraph titled LEED Documentation Submittals.




A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers that include a certified irrigation designer qualified by The Irrigation Association.



A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty irrigation system to provide service as designed and installed for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion.

B. Correct all problems which develop in the system due to faulty materials or workmanship during the warranty period.

C. Repair or replace such work as directed by the Landscape Architect and the Contracting Officer.

D. All Repairs are to be made within 48 hours of notification to the irrigation contractor or Government or their designee will make needed repairs. General Contractor shall pay for any such required repairs, and seek reimbursement from the irrigation contractor, as they shall so desire. The provision is intended to provide an incentive to General Contractor to see that his sub-contractor responds in a timely manner.

E. Provide written warranty for each segment of project stating date of substantial completion and guarantee period.

F. The Government reserves right to make temporary repairs during the warranty period as necessary to keep systems in operating condition without voiding Contractor's warranty, nor relieving Contractor of his responsibility.

G. Contractor shall provide an instructional session for the Government in regard to winterization and spring start-up procedures prior to final acceptance.

1.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide three individually bound manuals detailing operation and maintenance requirements for irrigation systems.



B. Manuals shall be delivered to The Contracting Officer no later than ten (10) days prior to completion of Work.

C. Provide descriptions of all installed materials and systems in sufficient detail to permit maintenance personnel to understand, operate, and maintain the equipment.

D. Provide the following in each manual:

1. Index sheet, stating irrigation contractor's name, address, telephone number and name of person to contact.

2. Duration of Warranty period. 3. Equipment list, to include the following:

a. Manufacturer's name. b. Make and model number. c. Name and address of local Manufacturer's distributor. d. Spare parts list. e. Detailed operating and maintenance instruction for major equipment.

1.9 CONTROLLER CHARTS

A. Do not prepare charts until record drawings have been approved by the Contracting Officer.

B. Provide on controller chart for each automatic controller installed.

1. Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting the controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility.

2. Chart shall be xerographic print of actual "as built" system, showing area covered by that controller.

C. Identify the area of coverage of each remote control valve, using distinctly different color, drown over entire area of coverage.

D. Following approval of charts by Contracting Officer, charts shall be laminated sealed between two layers of 10 mil thick clear plastic sheets.

E. Charts shall be completed and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to final review of irrigation system.

1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Refer to 01720 “Project Record Documents”.

B. Record dimensioned locations and depths for each of the following:

1. Point of connection. 2. Sprinkler pressure line. Provide dimensions for each 100 LF (maximum)

along each routing, and for each change of direction.



3. Gate valves, drain valve, quick couplers. 4. Sprinkler control valves. 5. Control wire routing. 6. Moisture sensing devices. 7. Sleeves. 8. Flush valves. 9. Other related items as may be directed by the Contracting Officer.

C. Locate dimensions from two permanent reference points (buildings, monuments, sidewalks, curbs, etc.).

1. Make dimensions accurately at the same scale used on original drawings, or larger. If photo reductions are required to facilitate controller chart housing, notes and/or dimensions must be a minimum 1/4 inch in size.

D. Record all changes which are made from Contract Drawings, including changes in pressure, and non-pressure lines.

E. Record all required information on a set of xerographic prints. Do not use these prints for any other purpose.

F. Maintain information daily. Keep drawings at site at all times and available for review of the Contracting Officer.

G. When record drawings have been approved by the Government’s representative, transfer all information electronically and provide xerographic prints to the Government and Government’s representative.

H. Electronic CAD files of as-built irrigation systems shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer.

I. Irrigation legend must be changed to accurately reflect the irrigation equipment installed, if such equipment is not same as originally specified on Contract Documents. This includes flow rates, effective spray diameter/radius and operating pressure of all sprinkler heads.


A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pip-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions



and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify The Contracting Officer per Section 01000. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without The Contracting

Officer's written permission.

1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Impact Sprinklers: Equal to ten percent of amount installed for each type and size indicated, but no fewer than three units.

2. Spray Sprinklers: Equal to ten percent of amount installed for each type and size indicated, but no fewer than five units.

3. Bubblers: Equal to ten percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than five units.

4. Emitters: Equal to ten percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 20 units.

5. Drip-Tube System Tubing: Equal to ten percent of total length installed for each type and size indicated, but not less than 100 feet.

6. Soaker Tubes: Equal to ten percent of total length installed for each type and size indicated, but not less than 50 feet.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight, Type E, Grade B.

1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless-steel pipe with threaded ends.

2. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends.

4. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

C. Ductile-Iron Pipe with Mechanical Joints: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and spigot ends.



1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

D. Ductile-Iron Pipe with Push-on Joint: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and spigot ends.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

E. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with

ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, and ASTM B 88, Type M, water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with

ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. PE Pipe with Controlled ID: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound; SIDR 11.5 and SIDR 15.

1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, nylon or propylene plastic with barbed ends. Include bands or other fasteners.

H. PE Pipe with Controlled OD: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound, SDR 11.

1. PE Butt, Heat-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261. 2. PE Socket-Type Fittings: ASTM D 2683.

I. PE Pressure Pipe: AWWA C906, with DR of 7.3, 9, or 9.3 and PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 160 psig 200 psig.

1. PE Butt, Heat-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261. 2. PE Socket-Type Fittings: ASTM D 2683.



J. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedules 40 and 80.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedules 40 and 80. 2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80. 3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both

headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends.

K. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21 and SDR 26.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80. 2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both

headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends.

2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

F. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 MANUAL VALVES

A. Curb Valves:


a. Amcast Industrial Corporation; Lee Brass Company. b. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). c. Jones, James Company. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. f. Red Hed Manufacturing & Supply.

2. Description:



a. Standard: AWWA C800.NPS 1 and Smaller Pressure Rating: 100 psig minimum, 150 psig.NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 Pressure Rating: 80 psig minimum, 150 psig.

b. Body Material: Brass or bronze with ball or ground-key plug. c. End Connections: Matching piping. d. Stem: With wide-tee head.

B. Curb-Valve Casing:

1. Standard: Similar to AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings. 2. Top Section: Telescoping, of length required for depth of burial of curb

valve. 3. Barrel: Approximately 3-inch diameter. 4. Plug: With lettering "WATER." 5. Bottom Section: With base of size to fit over valve. 6. Base Support: Concrete collar.

C. Shutoff Rods for Curb-Valve Casings: Furnish two steel, tee-handle shutoff rod(s) with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve for Project.

D. Brass Ball Valves:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. DynaQuip Controls. d. Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc. e. Hammond Valve. f. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. g. Jomar International, LTD. h. KITZ Corporation. i. Legend Valve. j. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries. k. Milwaukee Valve Company. l. NIBCO INC. m. Red-White Valve Corporation. n. RuB Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded or solder joint if indicated.



g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full or regular, but not reduced.

2.4 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators:


a. Cash Acme; a division of The Reliance Worldwide Corporation. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Honeywell International Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1003. b. Body Material: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior

lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.

c. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig. d. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-

1/2 and NPS 3.

B. Water Control Valves:


a. CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves. b. Flomatic Corporation. c. OCV Control Valves. d. Watts ACV; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description: Pilot-operation, diaphragm-type, single-seated main water control valve. Include small pilot control valve, restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping.

a. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.

b. Pattern: Angle-valve design. c. Trim: Stainless steel. d. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig minimum.



e. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2.5 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Bronze, Automatic Control Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. b. Ceres Products Company. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Netafim USA. e. Superior Controls Co., Inc. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division. g. Weathermatic.

2. Description: Cast-bronze body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.

2.6 AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES

A. Description: Spring-loaded-ball type of corrosion-resistant construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig.

2.7 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Transition Couplings:


a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Division. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company. f. Viking Johnson.

2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:




a. Harvel Plastics, Inc. b. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:


a. Colonial Engineering, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: MSS SP-107, PVC four-part union. Include one brass or stainless-steel threaded end, one solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries International, Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description: Factory-fabricated union, NPS 2 and smaller.

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum, 250 psig at 180 deg F. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;

threaded ferrous.



C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 and larger.

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum, 300 psig. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;

threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description: Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges, NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. b. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. c. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. d. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Couplings:


a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation.

2. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling.

a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. b. End Connections: Female threaded. c. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.



F. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Perfection Corporation. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Victaulic Company.

2. Description: Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. b. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. c. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, with bellows or piston-type pressurized cushioning chamber and in sizes complying with PDI WH 201, Sizes A to F.

B. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inch-diameter dial, dial range of two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet.

2.10 SPRINKLERS

A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at available water pressure.

B. Metal, Exposed, Impact-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:


a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. b. Ceres Products Company. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Construction: Brass and other corrosion-resistant metals. b. Mounting: Aboveground, exposed on riser.

C. Plastic, Exposed, Impact-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:




a. Champion Irrigation Products. b. K-RAIN Manufacturing Corporation. c. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. d. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. e. Senninger Irrigation, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Construction: ABS and corrosion-resistant metals. b. Mounting: Aboveground, exposed on riser.

D. Plastic, Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:


a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. b. Champion Irrigation Products. c. Hunter Industries Incorporated. d. Irritrol Systems. e. K-RAIN Manufacturing Corporation. f. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. g. Rain Bird Corporation. h. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division. i. Weathermatic.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS. b. Nozzle: Brass. c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant.

E. Metal, Pop-up, Impact-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:


a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc.

2. Description:

a. Case: Brass. b. Body Material: Brass. c. Pop-up Height: Approximately 3 inches.



d. Sprinkler Construction: Brass and other corrosion-resistant metals.

F. Plastic, Pop-up, Impact-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:


a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. b. Ceres Products Company. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. e. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division.

2. Description:

a. Case: ABS. b. Pop-up Height: Approximately 3 inches. c. Sprinkler Construction: ABS and other corrosion-resistant metals.

G. Metal, Surface Spray Sprinklers:


a. Ceres Products Company. b. Champion Irrigation Products.

2. Description:

a. Body Material and Flange: Brass. b. Nozzle: Brass. c. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.

H. Plastic, Surface Spray Sprinklers:


a. Ceres Products Company. b. Champion Irrigation Products. c. Hit Products Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Body Material and Flange: ABS. b. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.

I. Metal, Surface, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:




a. Ceres Products Company. b. Champion Irrigation Products. c. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Body Material and Flange: Brass. b. Nozzle: Brass. c. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.

J. Plastic, Surface, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:


a. Ceres Products Company. b. Champion Irrigation Products. c. Hit Products Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Body Material and Flange: ABS. b. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.

K. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:


a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. b. Ceres Products Company. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Hit Products Corporation. e. Hunter Industries Incorporated. f. K-RAIN Manufacturing Corporation. g. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. h. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. i. Rain Bird Corporation. j. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division. k. Weathermatic.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS. b. Nozzle: Brass.



c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. e. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.

L. Metal Shrub Sprinklers:


a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. b. Ceres Products Company. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. e. Weathermatic.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: Brass. b. Nozzle: Brass. c. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.

M. Plastic Shrub Sprinklers:


a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. b. Ceres Products Company. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Dig Corporation. e. Hunter Industries Incorporated. f. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. g. Senninger Irrigation, Inc. h. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division. i. Weathermatic.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS or other plastic. b. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.

2.11 QUICK COUPLERS


1. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc.



2. Ceres Products Company. 3. Champion Irrigation Products. 4. Hunter Industries Incorporated. 5. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. 6. Rain Bird Corporation. 7. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division. 8. Weathermatic.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key.

1. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant locking feature. Include two matching key(s).

2.12 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES


1. Agrifim. 2. Aquarius Brands, Inc. 3. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. 4. Dig Corporation. 5. Geoflow, Inc. 6. Hendrickson Bros. 7. Hit Products Corporation. 8. Irritrol Systems. 9. Maxijet, Inc. 10. NDS/Raindrip. 11. Netafim USA. 12. Olson Irrigation Systems. 13. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. 14. Rain Bird Corporation. 15. Roberts Irrigation Products, Inc. 16. Salco Products. 17. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division.

B. Freestanding Emitters: Device to deliver water at approximately 20 psig.

1. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control. 2. Riser to Emitter: PE or PVC flexible tubing.

C. Manifold Emitter Systems: Manifold with tubing and emitters.

1. Manifold: With multiple outlets to deliver water to emitters.

a. Body Material: Plastic.



b. Outlet Caps: Plastic, for outlets without installed tubing. c. Operation: Automatic pressure compensating.

2. Tubing: PE or PVC; 1/8-inch minimum ID. 3. Emitter: Device to deliver water at approximately 20 psig.

a. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control.

D. Multiple-Outlet Emitter Systems: Emitter with tubing and button-type outlets.

1. Emitter: With multiple outlets to deliver water to remote outlets.

a. Body Material: Plastic, with flow control. b. Outlet Caps: Plastic, for outlets without installed tubing. c. Operation: Automatic pressure compensating. d. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig.

2. Tubing: PE or PVC; 1/8-inch minimum ID.

E. Drip Tubes with Direct-Attached Emitters:

1. Tubing: Flexible PE or PVC with plugged end. 2. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig.

a. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control. b. Mounting: Inserted into tubing at set intervals.

F. Drip Tubes with Remote Discharge:

1. Tubing: Flexible PE or PVC with plugged end. 2. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig.

a. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control. b. Mounting: Inserted into tubing at set intervals.

G. Off-Ground Supports: Plastic stakes.

H. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 3/4, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig.

I. Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit.

J. Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.

K. Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.



2.13 CONTROLLERS


1. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc. 2. Champion Irrigation Products. 3. Hit Products Corporation. 4. Hunter Industries Incorporated. 5. Irritrol Systems. 6. K-RAIN Manufacturing Corporation. 7. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. 8. Netafim USA. 9. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. 10. Rain Bird Corporation. 11. Superior Controls Co., Inc. 12. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division. 13. Weathermatic.

B. Description:

1. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station is variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each station.

2. Exterior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4, weatherproof, with locking cover and two matching keys; include provision for grounding.

a. Body Material: Enameled-steel sheet metal, Stainless-steel sheet metal, or Molded plastic.

b. Mounting: Freestanding type for concrete base or Surface type for wall.

c. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer for body material and mounting type and location.

3. Interior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, dripproof, with locking cover and two matching keys.

a. Body Material: Enameled-steel sheet metal, Stainless-steel sheet metal, or Molded plastic.

b. Mounting: Freestanding type for concrete base or Surface type for wall.

c. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer for body material and mounting type and location.

4. Control Transformer: 24-V secondary, with primary fuse. 5. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock, with automatic operations

to skip operation any day in timer period, to operate every other day, or to operate two or more times daily.



a. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without disturbing preset automatic operation.

b. Nickel-Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically powers timing device during power outages.

c. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide-varistor type on each station and primary power.

6. Moisture Sensor: Adjustable from one to seven days, to shut off water flow during rain.

7. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors; insulated cable; suitable for direct burial.

a. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers.

b. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench.

c. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial.

8. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete not less than 36 by 24 by 4 inches thick, and 6 inches greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller. Include opening for wiring.

2.14 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic Boxes:


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Nationwide Plastics, Inc. d. NewBasis. e. Oldcastle, Inc. f. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. g. USFilter/Plymouth Products, Inc.

2. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade.

a. Size: As required for valves and service. b. Shape: Rectangular. c. Sidewall Material: PE, ABS, or FRP. d. Cover Material: PE, ABS, or FRP.



1) Lettering: " IRRIGATION."

B. Polymer Concrete Boxes:


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation d. Christy Concrete Products. e. NewBasis. f. Strongwell Corporation; Lenoir City Division.

2. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade.

a. Size: As required for valves and service. b. Shape: Rectangular. c. Sidewall Material: Polymer concrete with lateral and vertical sidewall

design loading of 2268kg (5000 lb ) minimum over 10 by 254 by 254 mm (10 inches ) square.

d. Cover Material: Reinforced polymer concrete with cover design loading of 2268 kg (5000 lb ) minimum over 254 by 254 mm (10 by 10 inches) square.

1) Lettering: IRRIGATION.

C. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch minimum to 3 inches maximum.

2.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS

A. Deliver the following items to The Contracting Officer when work is completed and prior to final acceptance.

1. 30 inch sprinkler keys for operation of manual drain valves. 2. Two keys for each automatic controller. 3. Two keys for opening valve boxes. 4. 72 inch steel tee wrench for operating main shutoff valve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."



B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs.

C. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3 inches, to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material.

D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 36 inches below finished grade, or not less than 18 inches below average local frost depth, whichever is deeper.

2. Lateral Piping: 12 inches. 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches. 4. Sleeves: 24 inches.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain the Contracting Officer’s approval before excavation.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings to indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves.

C. Install piping free of sags and bends.

D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 or smaller pipe connection.

G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2 or larger pipe connection.

H. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 690.

I. Install expansion loops in control-valve boxes for plastic piping.

J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.

K. Install ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600.



L. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing.

M. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. Install aboveground or in control-valve boxes.

N. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves aboveground or in control-valve boxes.

O. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks.

P. Install sleeves made of Schedule 80 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

Q. Install transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to the following:

1. Underground Piping:NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings.NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA transition couplings.

2. Aboveground Piping:NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings.NPS 2 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits with one plastic flange.

R. Install dielectric fittings for dissimilar-metal pipe connections according to the following:

1. Underground Piping:NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric coupling or dielectric nipple.NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Prohibited except in control-valve box.

2. Aboveground Piping:NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric union.NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Dielectric flange.NPS 5 and Larger: Dielectric flange kit.

3. Piping in Control-Valve Boxes:NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric union.NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Dielectric flange.NPS 5 and Larger: Dielectric flange kit.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.



2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Flanged Joints: Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

E. Ductile-Iron Piping Gasketed Joints: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

F. Copper-Tubing Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal.

G. Copper-Tubing Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux to tube end unless otherwise indicated. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.

H. PE Piping Fastener Joints: Join with insert fittings and bands or fasteners according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

I. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

J. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Underground Curb Valves: Install in curb-valve casings with tops flush with grade.

B. Underground Iron Gate Valves, Resilient Seat: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install in valve casing with top flush with grade.

1. Install valves and PVC pipe with restrained, gasketed joints.

C. Aboveground Valves: Install as components of connected piping system.

D. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in boxes for automatic control valves or aboveground between shutoff valves. Install full-size valved bypass.



E. Throttling Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

F. Drain Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed.

B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights.

C. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install freestanding emitters on pipe riser to mounting height indicated.

B. Install manifold emitter systems with tubing to emitters. Plug unused manifold outlets. Install emitters on off-ground supports at height indicated.

C. Install multiple-outlet emitter systems with tubing to outlets. Plug unused emitter outlets. Install outlets on off-ground supports at height indicated.

D. Install drip tubes with direct-attached emitters on ground.

E. Install drip tubes with remote-discharge on ground with outlets on off-ground supports at height indicated.

F. Install off-ground supports of length required for indicated mounted height of device.

G. Install application pressure regulators and filter units in piping near device being protected, and in control-valve boxes.

H. Install air relief valves and vacuum relief valves in piping, and in control-valve boxes.

3.8 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install interior controllers on wall.


2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install exterior freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases.




2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches below or beside piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water supply from exterior water service piping, water meters, protective enclosures, and backflow preventers. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect wiring between controllers and automatic control valves.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller.

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of trenches. See Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for warning tapes.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Refer to Specification Section 312000, paragraph 3.16.

B. Perform tests and inspections. Refer to Specification Section 312000, paragraph 3.16.





1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports and provide to Contracting Officer.

3.12 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal.

3.13 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust settings of controllers.

B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit.

C. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish grade.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.

3.15 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Government's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control valves and controllers.



3.16 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

B. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges or unions instead of joints indicated.

C. Aboveground irrigation main piping, NPS 4 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L or Type M hard copper tube, wrought- or cast-copper fittings, and brazed or soldered joints.

D. Aboveground irrigation main piping, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Galvanized-steel pipe and galvanized-steel pipe nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Schedule 80, PVC pipe; Schedule 80, threaded PVC fittings; and threaded

joints.

4. Underground irrigation main piping, NPS 4 and smaller, shall be one of the following:Type L soft copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

5. DN 100 (NPS 4PE pressure pipe; PE butt, heat-fusion or socket-type fittings; and heat-fusion joints.

6. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 7. Schedule 80, PVC pipe; Schedule 80, threaded PVC fittings; and threaded

joints. 8. SDR 21, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 80, PVC socket fittings; and

solvent-cemented joints.

E. Underground irrigation main piping, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 2. SDR 21, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 80, PVC socket fittings; and


F. Lateral piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. SIDR 7 or SIDR 9, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and fastener joints.

2. DR 9 or DR 11, PE, controlled OD pipe; PE butt, heat-fusion, or PE socket-type fittings; and heat-fusion joints.

3. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 4. SDR 26, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC socket fittings; and


G. Lateral piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:



1. SIDR 7 or SIDR 9, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and banded or fastener joints.

2. DR 9 or DR 11, PE, controlled OD pipe; PE socket or butt-fusion fittings; and heat-fusion joints. NPS 3 pipe and fittings if NPS 2-1/2 pipe and fittings are not available.

3. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

H. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints.

1. Option: Plastic swing-joint assemblies, with offsets for flexible joints, manufactured for this application.

I. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: Type L or Type M hard copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

J. Drain piping shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

3.17 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Underground, Shutoff-Duty Valves: Use the following:NPS 2 and Smaller: Curb valve, curb-valve casing, and shutoff rod.NPS 3 and Larger: Iron gate valve, resilient seated; iron gate valve casing; and operating wrench(es).

1. Aboveground, Shutoff-Duty Valves:

2. DN 50 (NPS 2and Smaller: Brass ball valve.

3. DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2and Larger: Iron ball valve.

4. Throttling-Duty Valves:

5. DN 50 (NPS 2and Smaller: Bronze automatic control valve.

B. DN 65 and DN 80 (NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3): Bronze automatic control valve.

1. Drain Valves:

2. DN 15 and DN 20 (NPS 1/2 and NPS 3/4): Automatic drain valve.NPS 1/2 and NPS 3/4: Bronze gate valve.

3. DN 25 to DN 50 (NPS 1 to NPS 2): Brass ball valve.

3.18 OPERATING INSTRUCTION

A. Train the Grounds Maintenance personnel in proper operation of all major equipment, including winterization procedure.



B. Provide this training at Grounds Supervisor's convenience.

C. Submit written evidence that training has been successfully completed.

3.19 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of work, restore ground surface to required elevation and remove excess materials, debris and equipment from the site to the satisfaction of Grounds Supervisor.

3.20 WINTER DRAINAGE

A. Contractor shall drain system and blow out any residual water with compressed air the first winter and then close all valves ready for the following spring operation. The Grounds Supervisor shall be witness to this work.

END OF SECTION


329200- 1 LAWNS AND GRASSES

SECTION 329200

LAWNS AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding. 2. Hydroseeding. 3. Sodding. 4. Meadow grasses and wildflowers. 5. Turf renovation. 6. Erosion-control material(s).

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for filling and backfilling. 3. Division 32 Section "Planting Irrigation " for turf irrigation. 4. Division 32 Section "Exterior Plants" for border edgings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of mulches, turf, or final surface treatments.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.



G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's

application instructions specific to this Project.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for dryland grasses. Include identification

of source and name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer.

D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.

E. Material Test Reports: For standardized ASTM D 5268 topsoil.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Government for maintenance of turf and dryland grasses during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf and dryland grasses establishment. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of

either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.

2. Experience: Three years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation,

maintenance, and irrigation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior. b. Certified Turfgrass Professional, designated CTP.



c. Certified Turfgrass Professional of Cool Season Lawns, designated CTP-CSL.

5. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

6. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type existing on site, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil. 1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's

Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location,

and number of samples to be taken per instructions from The Contracting Officer. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.

3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and

soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

C. Bulk Materials:



1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.


A. Planting Restrictions: Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Submit planting schedule to the Landscape architect and the Contracting

Officer and obtain written approval before planting. 2. Contractor must warrantee all work regardless of planting times.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace turf and grasses that fail in growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Government, or incidents that are beyond Contractor’s control.

b. Structural failures including settling. c. Faulty performance of stabilization and edgings.

2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: a. One Year: Turf and grasses.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead sod and replace unless required to plant in

the succeeding planting season. b. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period,

for replaced turf and grass materials. c. Reseed and germinate any rejected areas and monitor to ensure proper,

lush growth.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods:



1. Seeded Turf: 90 days from date of planting completion Substantial Completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting

season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

2. Sodded Turf: 90 days from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Initial Dryland Grasses Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable meadow is established, but for not less than 40 days from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Government, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified, Approved, Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and no weed seed: 1. Sod shall be a drought tolerant blend containing 3 or more improved varieties

of sod type. Submit sod specifications to the Contracting Officer for review. 2. Provide sod composed principally of following:

a. Tall Fescue: Provide sod containing at least three improved varieties of high endophyte turf-type all fescues that are deep rooted, winter hardy, and sun/shade tolerant.

3. All sod species shall be selected for drought tolerance and adaptability to Rocky Mountain front range region.

2.2 DRYLAND GRASSES

A. Dryland Grasses: Fresh, clean and dry new seed, of mixed species as follows: 1. 30 percent Ephraim Crested Wheatgrass. 2. 25 percent Perennial Rye Grass. 3. 20 percent Blue Fescue. 4. 15 percent Canada Bluegrass. 5. 10 percent Chewings Fescue



B. Seed Rate: 40 lbs. per acre.

2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.

B. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

C. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

E. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve.

F. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

G. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.

H. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard

trimmings; or source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. 1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood

derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum rate of 0.15 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum rate of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark.



E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. No fee lot manures or others high in salts.

2.5 FERTILIZERS

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and

2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts

recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent

potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts


2.6 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 6 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. 2. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3

B. Planting Soil: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. 1. Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil:

Screened and free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of



obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes, grubs, other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease-causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air-filled, pore-space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis.

2. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. b. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3

2.7 MULCHES

A. Sphagnum Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, and with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

B. Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.

C. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 2 to 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard


D. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

E. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

2.8 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to Government, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by The Contracting Officer.



B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

2.9 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

B. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

C. Erosion-Control Mats: Cellular, non-biodegradable slope-stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface, of 3-inch nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Invisible Structures, Inc.; Slopetame 2. b. Presto Products Company, a business of Alcoa; Geoweb. c. Tenax Corporation - USA; Tenweb. d. Other equal manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint

washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.

3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by The Contracting Officer and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching

overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Government's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and

thoroughly blend planting soil. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed

within a few days. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) but not less than

required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil over loosened

subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 100 mm (4 inches) of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 8 inches. Apply soil amendments

and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inchesof soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. a. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before

loosening. 3. Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash,

and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off

Government's property.



D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F. Before planting, obtain Contracting Officer's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article.

B. For erosion-control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion-control mats. Install erosion-control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.

C. Fill cells of erosion-control mat with planting soil and compact before planting.

D. For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.

E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

3.5 SEEDING

A. Drill seed with a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of

planting saucer.

B. Drill seed at a total rate of 40 lbs. per acre.

C. Drill seed into top 1/4 inch–1/2 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 2:1 with erosion-control blankets and 3.1 with erosion-control fiber mesh installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect seeded areas with erosion-control mats where shown on Drawings; install and anchor according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Spread uniformly to form a continuous blanket in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.



G. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds to ensure germination and full lush development within 6 months after seeding.

3.6 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply

slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate.

3.7 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 4:1. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 2:1 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as

recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

3.8 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other

processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations,

add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens

or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.



B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of

seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to

turf area.

3.9 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by the Contracting Officer: 1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform,

close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.

2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.10 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of Government and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Government's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Contracting Officer before each application is performed.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.



3.11 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

END OF SECTION


329300- 1 EXTERIOR PLANTS

SECTION 329300

EXTERIOR PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Planting soils. 3. Tree stabilization. 4. Landscape edgings. 5. Tree grates.

B. Related Sections: 1. 311000 Site Clearing 2. 312000 Earth Moving 3. 328400 Planting Irrigation 4. 329200 Lawns and Grasses

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. USDA Handbook no. 60: Diagnosis and Improvement of Saline and Alkali Soils, United States Department of Agriculture.

B. ANSI Z60.1: American Standard for Nursery Stock, American National Standards Institute.

C. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

D. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

E. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

F. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.



G. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

H. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

I. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

J. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

K. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

L. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

M. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

N. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

O. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

P. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

Q. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

R. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

S. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.



1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.

2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the Project.

3. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. Obtain required written approval from Landscape Architect for plants before proceeding with installation.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Trees and Shrubs: Three samples of each variety and size delivered to the site

for review. Maintain approved samples on-site as a standard for comparison 2. Cobble Mulch: 15 lb of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags

labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material.

3. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches. 4. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify

color selected.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of Governments' contact persons.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to

methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

E. Material Test Reports: For standardized ASTM D 5268.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Government for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.



1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.

2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation,

maintenance, irrigation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior. 5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type existing on site, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil. 1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's

Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling; with depth, location,

and number of samples to be taken per instructions from the Government. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.

3. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments

and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. 1. Selection of plants purchased under allowances will be made by the

Contracting Officer, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting. Obtain required written approval for plant quality from Landscape Architect before installation.

E. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal

position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for



field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

F. Plant Material Observation: The Contracting Officer and Landscape Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. The Government and Landscape Architect retain the right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1. Notify the Contracting Officer and Landscape Architect of sources of planting

materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and

pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk

materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.

C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

D. Handle planting stock by root ball and not by branching.

E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or

other acceptable material.



2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.

3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Refer to Division 1 Specs, section 01000.

C. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: April – Early July. 2. Fall Planting: September – Early November. 3. Alternative Planting Times – May be allowed only with written approval from

Landscape Architect

D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

E. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. 1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect

turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Government, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization, edgings and tree grates. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond

normal weathering. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Final Acceptance:



a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months from the date of substantial completion.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in

the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy

condition at end of warranty period. c. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period,

for replaced plant material.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting completion.

B. Initial Maintenance Service for Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches

where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be



used if acceptable to the Contracting Officer, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

D. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings.

E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting Retain paragraph below for annuals or biennials. ANSI Z60.1 does not include them. Revise to suit Project; insert sizes of pots or containers if required.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.

B. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

C. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

E. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve.

F. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

G. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.

H. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch 3/4-inch 1/2-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard




B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. 1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood

derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum rate of 0.15 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum rate of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark.

D. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth. Low in salts.

2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

2.5 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts


B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts


C. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots. 1. Size: 5-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5

percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

2.6 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 6 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension



and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. 2. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3.

B. Planting Soil: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs, or marshes. 1. Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil:

Screened and free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes; grubs; or other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease-causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air-filled pore space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis.

2. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. b. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3

2.7 MULCHES

A. Cobble Mulch: Natural round river cobble stones washed free of loam, sand, clay and other foreign substances of the following type, size range and color: 1. Type: Natural round river cobble stones. 2. Size: 4-12” diameter. 3. Color: Mix of Gray, Red and Browns.

2.8 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally-encountered chemicals, alkalis, acids, and UV Rays.

B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd..



C. All weed barriers installed shall thoroughly prevent all weed growth penetration throughout beds.

2.9 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to Government, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by Government.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

2.10 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS

A. Stakes and Guys: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, free of knots,

holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end.

2. Wood Deadmen: Timbers measuring 8 inches in diameter and 48 inches long, treated with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment.

3. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes or turnbuckles.

4. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter.

5. Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets.

6. Guy Cables: Five-strand, 3/16-inch-diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts.

7. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long. 8. Proprietary Staking-and-Guying Devices: Proprietary stake and adjustable tie

systems to secure each new planting by plant stem; sized as indicated and per manufacturer's written recommendations. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Arborbrace; ArborBrace Tree Guying System, or equal. 2) Decorations for Generations, Inc.; Reddy Stake, Mega Stake

System, or equal.

B. Root-Ball Stabilization Materials: 1. Upright Stakes and Horizontal Hold-Down: Rough-sawn, sound, new

hardwood or softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated; stakes pointed at one end.



2. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

2.11 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, rolled or safety edge, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Border Concepts, Inc., or equal. b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc., or equal. c. Russell, J. D. Company (The), or equal. d. Sure-Loc Edging Corporation or equal. e. Ryerson or equal.

2. Edging Size: 3/16 inch wide by 4 inches deep. 3. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 12 inches long. 4. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers. 5. Finish: Zinc coated or powder coated finish.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint

washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.

3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.



B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and only during favorable weather conditions.

C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by the Government and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out plants at locations directed by the Contracting Officer. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. Inform the Contracting Officer of planting dates at least two weeks in advance of installation.

D. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. 1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at

nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.

E. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Government's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and

thoroughly blend planting soil. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed

within a few days. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet

finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil over

loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.



B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Before planting, obtain Contracting Officer's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and

burlapped, potted, and container grown stock. 2. Excavate 6 inches deeper than depth of root ball, measured from root flare to

bottom of root ball.. 3. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the

correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 4. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the

Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.

5. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 6. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by

Installer's personnel. 7. If drain tile is shown on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate

to top of porous backfill over tile.

B. Subsoil removed from excavations may not be used as planting soil.

C. Obstructions: Notify the Contracting Officer if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

D. Drainage: Notify the Contracting Officer if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. If planting hole excavations do not percolate or drain completely within 24 hours do not plant and inform Landscape Architect of poor drainage conditions encountered. Extra remedial measures will be necessary.

3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING

A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.



B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches above adjacent finish grades for deciduous plants and 6 inches above adjacent finish grades for evergreen trees. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut

and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. Set balled, potted, container-grown stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches above adjacent finish grades for deciduous plants and 6 inches above adjacent finished grades for evergreen trees. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or

plant. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids

and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball at a 4:1 maximum finished slope.

3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. Do not prune leaders.



B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by the Landscape Architect.

C. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.7 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake

trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.

2. Use two or three stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.

3. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

B. Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches in caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. 1. Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method:

a. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at least 36 inches below grade. Provide turnbuckle for each guy wire and tighten securely.

b. Support trees with strands of cable or multiple strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

c. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade.

3.8 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees and Tree-like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply cobble mulch ring of 6-8

inch average thickness, with 36-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

2. Cobble Mulch in Planting Areas: Hand place Cobbles over geotextile weed barrier to a minimum depth of 6-8 inches. Fill voids between cobbles half full with clean pea gravel. Set top of cobbles flush with adjacent paving and/or edger so that cobbles remain securely within the cobble mulch bed.



3.9 EDGING INSTALLATION

A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where rock mulch beds meet sod and / or dry land grass turf areas. Edger shall be securely staked set flush with top of mulch and adjacent turf. Layout edger in smooth curves. Kinked or mismatched ends are unacceptable. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches apart, driven below top elevation of edging.

3.10 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.11 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with Government and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Government's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Contracting Officer before each application is performed.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Protect plantings from damage from applications.

3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.



C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

3.13 DISPOSAL

A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Government's property.

END OF SECTION


330500 -1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

SECTION 330500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

Pipe Bedding Piping & Joining Material Pipe Fittings Mechanical Joint Restraint Resilient Seated Gate Valves Valve Boxes Indicator Posts Polyethylene Encasement Material Sleeves Identification Devices Concrete Kickblocks Chlorination Hydrostatic Testing

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and

physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic. D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. E. DIP: Ductile Iron Pipe

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pipe Material 2. Pipe Fittings 3. Identification Devices




A. Class of pipe requirements shown or called for on the plans shall be the minimum acceptable.

B. Water mains, services and appurtenances shall be subject to hydrostatic and leakage tests.

C. Water mains, services, and appurtenances shall be disinfected by the Contractor prior to connecting to existing systems.

D. Submit manufacturer's data on the pipe material, fittings, restrained joints, valves, post indicator valves, and service material prior to beginning of any pipe installation.

E. The maximum allowable deflection (out of roundness) of PVC pipe under superimposed loads shall be of the manufacturer’s recommendation.

F. The Contracting Officer may require manufacturer's certificates showing conformance with this specification for any of the pipe materials, fittings, valves and appurtenances delivered to the job site.

G. PVC Water line shall meet requirements of AWWA C900 and meet ASTM D1784

H. PVC Water line shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C605

I. PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe & Fittings Comply with ASTM D3034 & F477

J. PE Gas pipe shall comply with ASTM D2513, PE 2406 SDR11

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE BEDDING A. Refer also to Section 312000-Earth Moving. B. The pipe bedding shall consist of a durable crushed granular material with a well graded

mineral aggregate mixture, which will provide good stability. The size range of the aggregate shall be from 1/4-inch minimum to 3/4-inch maximum with a maximum amount of fines passing a No. 8 sieve not to exceed 5% by weight and shall conform to ASTM C-33 or ASTM D-448, gradation size #67. At least 50% of the material greater than the 3/8-inch sieve shall contain particles having 3 or more fractured faces.

C. Class B Bedding shall be defined as that method of bedding in which the pipe is set on an approved granular material. The trench shall be excavated to a depth below the bottom of the pipe as specified in the construction plans. The over excavation shall be backfilled with a clean granular material free from organic and/or unsuitable materials. The material shall be placed under the pipe and on either side of the pipe up to depths specified within the plans or manufactures recommendations. The placing shall be done in a manner which will assure no separation or change in uniform gradation. All bedding material shall be placed under the pipe haunches, then brought up in six inch (6”) lifts (maximum) and compacted by hand operated mechanical vibrators equally and thoroughly along each side of the pipe in such a manner as to avoid displacement of, or damage to the pipe. All bedding material



shall be compacted to a density of at least ninety percent (90%) as determined by the Modified Proctor Method, AASHTO designation T-180, before the next lift is placed.

2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. PVC C900 Pressure Water Pipe joints shall be made using an integral bell with an elastomeric gasket push-on type joint.

B. PVC Sewer Pipe: Sewer Pipe assembly of all joints shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Cemented line joints will not be accepted

C. PE Gas Pipe: Gas pipe shall be medium-density, meeting ASTM D2513. Joints and fittings shall comply with ASTM D3261 Butt Fusion Fittings and Joints.

D. Hard sleeve couplings shall be rated for a minimum of 200 psi.

2.3 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Ductile Iron Pipe – AWWA C151, Pressure Class 50

B. C900 PVC Water Pipe- Shall be of the dimension ratio (DR) or pressure class below:

Nominal DR Pressure Class (minimum)

4 inch 18 150

6 inch 18 150

C. PVC Sewer Pipe- Shall be Type PSM polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D3034 for 4-inch with Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of 35.

D. PE Gas Pipe: Shall be medium-density, meeting ASTM D2513.

2.4 PIPE FITTINGS A. Water pipe fittings (DIP) shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C110, or

C153. B. Ductile Iron fittings, nominal size 3 inch through 24 inch shall have a pressure rating of 350

psi. The grade of iron shall be 70/50/05 C. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated with an asphaltic material and lined with cement-mortar

and given a seal coat of asphaltic material in accordance with AWWA C104. Ductile iron fittings may also be lined and coated with fusion-bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C116.



D. PVC Sewer Pipe - Fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM D3034A paragraph 6.1

“Elastrometric Joint Gaskets”.

2.5 MECHANICAL JOINT RESTRAINT A. General- The restraint mechanism shall consist of numerous individually activated gripping

surfaces to maximize restraint capability. The gripping surfaces shall be wedges designed to spread the bearing surfaces on the pipe. Twist-off nuts, sized same as tee-head bolts, and shall be used to insure proper actuating of restraining devices. When the nut is sheared off, a standard hex nut shall remain

B. The mechanical joint restraint device for PVC shall have a working pressure of at least 150

psi with a minimum safety factor of 2:1.

2.6 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES

A. General- Resilient seated gate valves with a 150 pound class shall be design and manufactured in accordance with AWWA C509 or AWWA C515.

B. Valves shall be iron body, resilient seated gate valves with non-rising stems. If the resilient seats are bonded to the gates, the gates shall be totally encapsulated with the material except for guide tabs or slots.

C. Valves shall be suitable for frequent operation as well as service involving long periods of inactivity. Valves shall be capable of operating satisfactorily with flows in either direction, and shall provide zero leakage past the seat. The operating pressure for all sizes shall be 200 psig.

D. Valve stems shall be made of bronze in accordance with ASTM B 763, Copper Alloy No. C99500 or stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 276, Type 304, Type 316 or AISI 420. Valves shall be supplied with 2 inch square wrench nuts. Stem seal shall consist of two (2) O-rings. The valves shall open by turning to the right.

E. Bolting Material- Bonnet and gland bolts and nuts shall be either fabricated from a low alloy-steel for corrosion resistance or electro-plated with zinc or cadmium. The hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A 153 is not acceptable.

F. End Connection Flanges shall be sized and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 Class

125. Flanges shall be machined to a flat surface with a serrated finish in accordance with AWWA C207.

G. End Connection Mechanical joint components shall be in accordance with AWWA C111

with tee-head bolts and hexagon nuts fabricated from a high-strength, low alloy steel known in the industry as Cor-Ten, Usalloy, or Durabolt.

H. Valves shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C509 or AWWA C515. Machined



flange faces shall not be painted or coated with the same coating as the body but shall be shop coated with a rust preventive compound.

2.7 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes for the water and gas shall be the same type with the valve box lid labeled with utility type.

B. General-The manufacturer of valve box components shall be experienced in their design and construction, shall be regularly engaged in their manufacture and shall have produced valve boxes which have given successful service for a period of at least 5 years.

C. Materials-Valve box parts shall be made of gray cast iron, ASTM A 48, Class 35B. Use of an aluminum alloy as a casting material is not acceptable.

D. Box Description-Valve boxes shall be the three-piece adjustable screw type. The top sections shall be16 inches long and have the utility type indicated on valve box lid per the Base Standards.

2.8 INDICATOR POSTS

A. Indicator post for the fire line shall comply with Base standards and be provided where indicated.

2.9 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT MATERIAL

A. All polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C105, with the following additional requirements or exceptions.

B. The raw material used to manufacture polyethylene film shall be Type I, Class A, Grade E-1, in accordance with ASTM D 1248.

C. The polyethylene film shall meet the following test requirements: a. Tensile Strength-1200 psi minimum b. Elongation-300% minimum c. Dielectric Strength-800 V/mil thickness minimum d. Thickness -8 mils minimum nominal with minus tolerance not exceeding 10% of

nominal e. Flow Rate-0.4 maximum

2.10 SLEEVES A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 22 Section

"Common Work Results for Plumbing."



2.11 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Nameplates: Brass permanently fastened to service valves with data engraved or stamped. B. Each tag shall be 2” x 4” brass shall be riveted to the underside of the valve box lid and

shall contain the following information: a. Manufacturer b. Size c. Year manufactured d. Model # e. Year installed f. Depth of bury g. Direction of flow

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE BEDDING A. Unless specified otherwise on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, or

directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer and or Base Civil Engineer, the Contractor shall bed all conduit according to the Class B Bedding method using crushed granular bedding as noted in the Details. If, in the course of construction, it is determined that the pipe foundation is unsatisfactory or the prescribed maximum allowable trench width is exceeded, the Contracting Officer and or Base Civil Engineer may require that an alternate class of bedding be installed. The Contractor shall be required to place the improved bedding class or make other amends to remedy the construction, at his/her expense. No separate payment will be made for placement of the required granular or rock bedding material. All costs incurred will be considered to be included in the unit price bid for each section of pipe, associated structures, laterals and appurtenances

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping according to the following requirements, Base standards and manufacturer

requirements. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the construction drawings.

C. Pipe Storage: Pipe stored outside, and exposed to sunlight for more than 30 days, shall be

covered with an opaque material such as canvas. Clear plastic sheets shall not be used to cover pipe. Air circulation shall be provided under the covering.

D. Handling of Materials-Pipe and fittings shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting so as to

avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such material be dropped. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the replacement or repair of the



damaged pipe shall be done to the satisfaction of Contracting Officer. E. All underground gas piping shall have tracer wire and tracer tape. Tracer wire shall be 16

gauge or larger. Tracer wire shall terminate at the valve box and at the riser. Foil type tracer tape is not allowed.

F. All underground non-metallic piping shall be provided with bright-colored, continuously

printed plastic ribbon tape not less than 6-inches wide by 4-mil thick. Tape shall include a magnetically detectable conductor and be manufactured for direct burial service.

G. Pipes shall be cut, whenever necessary, to conform to location of fittings, line, or grade. Cuts shall be straight and true, in a workman like manner so as to leave a smooth end without damaging the pipe. Burrs shall be removed from the ends of cut pipe, and the end lightly rasped or filed.

H. Valves shall be handled in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage. Valves shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner previously specified for cleaning, laying and joining mechanical and push on joints. Valves shall be set in such a manner that the valve stems are plumb. Valves shall be wrapped with polyethylene encasement material.

I. A valve box shall be provided for every valve. The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve, and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover set to the finished grade elevation or raised to the proper elevation.

J. Clean outs shall be provided for all alignment changes on the sanitary sewer. The top of the clean out shall be set to the finished grade elevation or raised to the proper elevation.

K. Fittings for the waterline shall be mechanical joints. The use of wyes is strictly prohibited. Where PVC pipe is inserted into cast iron or ductile iron fittings, beveled portions of the spigots shall be removed to accommodate the expansion characteristics of the plastic to the lesser depth of bell. Repair fittings and stainless steel repair clamps shall be wrapped with polyethylene encasement. (Refer to Pipe Joint Construction this Section).

L. Polyethylene Encasement Material: Metallic pipe, joint restraint, fittings, tie rods and appurtenances regardless of soil resistivity, shall be polyethylene encased. The polyethylene encasement shall prevent contact between the pipe and bedding material, but is not intended to be a completely airtight and watertight enclosure. Polyethylene pipe wrap material shall be applied to line pipe. The polyethylene shall have a minimum thickness of 8 mils. A 2 inch wide 10 mil thickness polyethylene pressure-sensitive tape shall be used to close seams or hold overlaps. Prolonged exposure to sunlight will eventually deteriorate polyethylene film. Keep exposure to sunlight to a minimum. Damage to polyethylene pipe wrap in the trench prior to and during backfill shall be repaired.

M. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

N. Install piping at indicated slopes.

O. Install piping free of sags and bends.



P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

Q. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

R. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

S. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and manufacturer requirements.

B. Before placing pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material, kept clean at all times thereafter, and carefully examined for cracks and other defects before installation. Bell ends and spigot ends are to be examined with particular care.

C. Joint lubricant shall be as supplied by the pipe manufacturer. Joint lubricant shall be non-toxic, water soluble, and certified to meet NSF Standard 61.

D. Elastomeric Gasket Joint: Immediately before joining two lengths of PVC pipe, the inside of the bell or coupling, the outside of the spigot and the elastomeric gasket shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all foreign material. Lubrication of the joint and rubber gasket shall be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's specifications. Care shall be taken that only the correct elastomeric gasket, compatible with the annular groove of the bell, is used. Insertion of the elastomeric gasket in the annular groove of the bell or coupling shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark shall be marked before assembly to assure that the spigot end is inserted to the full depth of the joint. The spigot and bell or coupling shall be aligned and pushed until the reference line on the spigot is flush with the end of the bell or coupling. Pushing shall be done in a smooth, steady motion.

E. Mechanical Joint: Before joining mechanical joint cast iron fittings to pipe, the outside of the spigot, the inside of the bell, and the rubber gasket shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. Normal practice is to lubricate the joint with a soap solution; however, in cold weather the joint may be assembled dry. Extreme care shall be exercised in making dry joints. The gland shall be slipped on the spigot end of the pipe with the lip extension of the gland toward the socket, or bell end. The rubber gasket shall be placed on the spigot end with the thick edge toward the gland. The pipe shall be pushed in until the spigot end fully penetrates the bell. The gasket shall then



be pressed into place within the bell evenly around the entire joint. The cast iron gland shall be moved along the pipe into position for bolting; the bolts inserted, and the nuts screwed finger tight, then tightened with a torque limiting wrench to man specs. Nuts spaced 180 degrees apart shall be tightened alternately in order to produce equal pressure on all parts of the gland. Mechanical joint fittings shall be wrapped with polyethylene encasement material.

F. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

G. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

K. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

L. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

M. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasket Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

N. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasket Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. O. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean

cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

P. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

Q. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide brass directional markers at the service valves. Each 2” x 4” brass tag shall be

riveted to the underside of the valve box lid.

3.5 CONCRETE KICKBLOCKS A. Refer to Division 3 Section 033000 Cast in Place Concrete for material.



B. Installation: Kickblocks shall be constructed at all bends and fittings which require support due to unbalanced line thrust. Care shall be taken not to block outlets or to cover bolts, nuts, clamps or other fittings or to make them inaccessible. A bond breaker shall be placed between the pipe and the kickblock to aid in ease of future removal. For the same reason, if a large kickblock is to be placed, it shall be separated into sections by a suitable material. Bearing surface areas are minimum areas to bear against the undisturbed trench wall. In every instance, the kickblock shall bear against undisturbed earth. Before placing concrete, equipment for mixing and transporting the concrete shall be clean. Debris, water or ice shall be removed from the place to be occupied by the concrete. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen subgrade.

C. Formwork for Kickblocks: Forming for concrete kickblocks and anchors will be done by

bulk heading around the shape of the kickblock or anchor with wood, burlap sacks, or reinforced paper sacks filled with sand or earth. Sacks shall be of a size easily handled when full, and shall be left in place in the trench. Wood forms shall be removed before backfilling. If the main must be placed immediately into service, harness rods may be used in lieu of kickblocks or wood may be used to form up kickblocks. Wood forms shall be of such design as to support the thrust until the concrete has set and shall not be considered a substitute for the concrete kickblock. No horizontal struts or braces required for trench shoring shall remain in the concrete kickblocks. When concrete is deposited against ground without the use of forms, the ground shall be thoroughly moistened or other provisions made to prevent the ground from drawing water from the concrete.

D. Minimum Kickblock Curing Time: Newly placed concrete shall be allowed to set,

undisturbed, for a minimum of 24 hours. E. Compaction of Fill Over Kickblocks: Backfill may be placed over kickblocks once the

surface has set sufficiently to resist the weight of the backfill. However, no tamping or compacting shall be allowed above the kickblock for a minimum of 24 hours after placement.

3.6 CHLORINATION

A. Chlorine tablets may be used for disinfection in 12-inch and smaller pipes. Chlorine tablets shall be attached to the inside top of the pipe with an approved adhesive and certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 prior to pipe installation in the trench. An approved adhesive is Dow Corning 748 Multipurpose Sealant.

Number of hypochlorite tablets of 5 gram strength

Required for a dose of 50 milligrams/liter* Pipe Length (feet) 4 inch Pipe Diameter 6 inch Pipe Diameter

13 or less 2 2 18 2 2 20 2 2 *Based on 3 3/4 grams of available chlorine per tablet.

B. After the pipe is filled with water and chlorine, the chlorinated water shall be held in contact



with the pipe for 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour period, the water in the pipeline shall be tested by agency having jurisdiction, or their designated representative, to ensure a residual chlorine content of no less than 25 milligrams per liter. The pipeline shall then be thoroughly flushed to remove the heavily chlorinated water. Care shall be taken in flushing the pipeline to prevent property damage and danger to the public. Discharges of water from blowoff assemblies or other appurtenances shall be contained or discharged in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer.

C. Samples of water shall be collected for bacteriological examination and residual chlorine

content testing before the pipe is put into service. Testing of residual chlorine and sampling shall be done.

3.7 HYDROSTATIC TESTING

A. Newly installed water mains and firelines shall be hydrostatically tested. Hydrostatic tests shall not be made on any portion of the pipeline until field placed concrete has had adequate curing time for the kickblocks.

B. The Base Civil Engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of testing. The contactor

shall confirm if the Base Civil Engineer needs to be present at the time of testing. C. Only the following methods are acceptable for supplying potable water for hydrostatic

testing:

1. Water may be taken from a nearby pressurized water source that was previously chlorinated, tested, and accepted, such as a fire hydrant.

2. Any previously tested, chlorinated, and accepted water main that is pressurized and is to serve the new main extension may be tapped on the pressurized side of the closed valve.

. D. The Contractor will furnish the calibrated meter for testing and supply the pump. The

pipeline shall be properly backfilled and in a state of readiness for testing. Bulkheads, pumps, taps, and appurtenances necessary to fill the pipeline and maintain the required pressure shall be in place and the pipeline filled with water. The test pressure of 150 psi shall then be applied to the pipeline by means of a continuously operating pump that is equipped with a bypass valve for pressure regulation. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate that does not cause surges and does not exceed the rate at which air can be released. Air in the line shall be properly purged. While the test pressure is maintained, an examination shall be made of the pipeline and any leaks located and repaired. Pipe or fittings found to be faulty shall be removed and replaced. Leakage is not allowed through the bonnet of the line valve. A valve leaking through the bonnet may be repaired in place or removed and replaced. Cutting and replacement of pavement as well as excavation and backfilling may be necessary when locating and repairing leaks discovered during pressure testing.

E. After visible leaks are stopped, the full test pressure shall be maintained for 1 continuous

hour. Allowable leakage for each section between line valves shall not exceed the following leakage rates for 4 through 20-inch distribution and transmission mains:



Allowable Leakage Per Hour

Pipe Size (inches) Gallons per 1,000 feet of Pipe 4 0.33 6 0.50

F. Should testing show a leakage rate in excess of the rates shown, the pipeline will not be

accepted. The pipeline shall be repaired, rechlorinated as described above, and retested until it meets test requirements.



334100 - 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

SECTION 334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe & Pipe Outlets

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:

1. Pipe material


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

B. Notify Base no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of service without the written permission of the Base.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) single wall plastic corrugated pipe and fittings: ASTM F 405

B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 76 and C 361

2.2 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control." Average Size: 12 inches.

B. Energy Dissipaters: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. A-1, 3-ton average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth

Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

B. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following:

1. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. 2. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. 3. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. 4. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

C. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

D. Re-inspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

E. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

F. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. G. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice.

I. Submit separate report for each test.



J. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and the following:

1. Exception: Piping with soil tight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. 3. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924

K. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

L. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.




This page is intentionally left blank